Motorola Solutions 89FC5794 Enhanced Base Transceiver System (EBTS) User Manual Quad BR 800 Tx FCC Filing

Motorola Solutions, Inc. Enhanced Base Transceiver System (EBTS) Quad BR 800 Tx FCC Filing

Exhibit D Users Manual

APPLICANT:  MOTOROLA  INC. EQUIPMENT TYPE:  ABZ89FC5794EXHIBIT 8 INSTRUCTION MANUALSThe instruction and service manual for this base radio are not published at this time.  However, draft copy of themanual is available and has been included as part of the filing package in the form of an electronic pdf document.Upon request, published and/or printed manuals will be sent to the commission and/or telecommunicationcertification body (TCB) as soon as they become available.  All of the descriptions and schematics included thisfiling package are up to date.
APPLICANT:  MOTOROLA  INC. EQUIPMENT TYPE:  ABZ89FC5794EXHIBIT 9TUNE-UP PROCEDUREThere is no field tune-up procedure.  All adjustments are software controlled and are pre-set at the factory.  Certainstation operating parameters can be changed via man-machine interface (MMI) commands, within predeterminedlimits.  Examples include transmit / receiver operating frequencies and power level.
 68P81099E10-DECCN 5E992 Network Solutions Sector ENHANCED BASE TRANSCEIVER SYSTEM (EBTS) VOLUME 2 OF 3BASE RADIOS © 2000 Motorola, Inc.All Rights ReservedPrinted in U.S.A.
 FCC INTERFERENCE WARNING The FCC requires that manuals pertaining to Class A computing devices must contain warnings about possible interference with local residential radio and TV reception. This warning reads as follows:Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. INDUSTRY OF CANADA NOTICE OF COMPLIANCE This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada. COMMERCIAL WARRANTY (STANDARD) Motorola radio communications products (the “Product”) is warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of ONE (1) YEAR (except for crystals and channel elements which are warranted for a period of ten (10 years) from the date of shipment. Parts including crystals and channel elements, will be replaced free of charge for the full warranty period but the labor to replace defective parts will only be provided for One Hundred-Twenty (120) days from the date of shipment. Thereafter purchaser must pay for the labor involved in repairing the Product or replacing the parts at the prevailing rates together with any transportation charges to or from the place where warranty service is provided. This express warranty is extended by Motorola, 1301 E. Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 to the original end use purchaser only, and only to those purchasing for purpose of leasing or solely for commercial, industrial, or governmental use.THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WHICH ARE SPECIFICALLY EXCLUDED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW.In the event of a defect, malfunction or failure to conform to specifications established by Motorola, or if appropriate to specifications accepted by Motorola in writing, during the period shown, Motorola, at its option, will either repair or replace the product or refund the purchase price thereof. Repair at Motorola's option, may include the replacement of parts or boards with functionally equivalent reconditioned or new parts or boards. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts or product shall become the property of Motorola.This express commercial warranty is extended by Motorola to the original end user purchaser or lessee only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by Motorola. Motorola assume no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of Motorola. Unless made in a separate agreement between Motorola and the original end user purchaser, Motorola does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Products.Motorola cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by Motorola which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use Product is unique, Motorola disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty.This warranty does not cover:a) Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner.b) Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water or neglect c) Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance installation, alteration, modification, or adjusting. d) Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. e) A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassemblies or repairs (including without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-Motorola supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with Motorola's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim.f) Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. g) A Product which, due to illegal to unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with Motorola's published specifications or the FCC type acceptance labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from Motorola.This warranty sets forth the full extent of Motorola's responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase date, at Motorola’s option is the exclusive remedy. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OR TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. SOFTWARE NOTICE/WARRANTY Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted Motorola software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such Motorola software. Motorola software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including without limitation alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such Motorola software or exercise of rights in such Motorola software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under Motorola patent rights or copyrights.This warranty extends only to individual products: batteries are excluded, but carry their own separate limited warranty.In order to obtain performance of this warranty, purchaser must contact its Motorola salesperson or Motorola at the address first above shown, attention Quality Assurance Department.This warranty applies only within the fifty (50) United States and the District of Columbia.
  68P81099E10-D 4/1/2000-UP i Network Solutions Sector 1301 E. Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196 1   Contents Contents.......................................................................................................................... iList of Figures .............................................................................................................. ivList of Tables................................................................................................................ vi Foreword................................................................................................................................. ixGeneral Safety Information .................................................................................................... xi 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Overview...............................................................................................1-1 Single Carrier Base Radio Overview.................................................................................... 1-4QUAD Channel Base Radio Overview ................................................................................ 1-9 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469;1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425 ................................................2-1 800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller .............................................................2-12 800 MHz Exciter – TLN3337;900 MHz Exciter – CLN1357;1500 MHz Exciter – TLN3428...................................................................................5-1 QUAD Channel 800 MHz Exciter ....................................................................................... 5-7 QUAD-Channel Power Amplifiers: 40W, 800 MHz – TLF2020 (TTF1580);70W, 800 MHz – TLN3335 (CTF1040);60W, 900 MHz – CLN1355 (CLF1300);40W, 1500 MHz – TLN3426;800 MHz QUAD – CLF1400 ......................................................................................6-1 Theory of Operation .............................................................................................................6-6 DC Power Supply for QUAD Channel  Base Radios...............................................7-1 QUAD CHANNEL DC Power Supply................................................................................. 7-4 AC Power Supply .......................................................................................................8-1800 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1283;900 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1356............................................................................9-1 1500 MHz Receiver – TLN3427.......................................................................................... 9-8
 ii 68P81099E10-D-C 4/1/2000 Contents EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800 MHz QUAD Channel Receiver – CLN1283;.............................................................. 9-12 Troubleshooting Single Channel Base Radios .................................................... 10-1 Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures ..................................................... 10-5Station Verification Procedures.......................................................................................... 10-9Single Channel BR Backplane.......................................................................................... 10-35 Troubleshooting QUAD Channel Base Radios..................................................... 11-1 Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures ..................................................... 11-5Station Verification Procedures........................................................................................ 11-10QUAD Channel BR Backplane ........................................................................................ 11-22QUAD Base Radio Signals............................................................................................... 11-35 Transmitter & Receiver Verification Procedures for Beta- Release Equipment 12-1Acronyms .....................................................................................................................13Index ....................................................................................................................Index-1
 iii 68P81099E10-D 4/1/2000 Contents EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 This Page IntentionallyLeft Blank
 iv 68P81099E10-D  1/15/2000 Contents EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 List of Figures List of Figures Figure:1-1 Base Radio (Typical) ..................................................................................................................... 1-4 Figure:1-2 QUAD Channel Base Radio (Typical) .......................................................................................... 1-9 Figure:1-3 800/900 MHz Base Radio Functional Block Diagram ................................................................ 1-15 Figure:1-4 1500 MHz Base Radio Functional Block Diagram ..................................................................... 1-16 Figure:1-5 800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Functional Block Diagram ............................................ 1-17 Figure:2-1 Base Radio Controller, version CLN1469 (with cover removed) ................................................. 2-2 Figure:2-2 Base Radio Controller, version TLN3425 (with cover removed).................................................. 2-2 Figure:2-3 BR Controller (Front View)........................................................................................................... 2-3 Figure:2-4 Base Radio Controller, version CLN1469 (with cover removed) ............................................... 2-12 Figure:2-5 BR Controller (Front View)......................................................................................................... 2-13 Figure:2-6 800/900 MHz Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram(Sheet 1 of 2) ................................................................................................................................2-23 Figure:2-6 800/900 MHz Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram(Sheet 2 of 2) ................................................................................................................................2-24 Figure:2-7 1500 MHz Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2) ................................................................................................................................2-25 Figure:2-8 1500 MHz Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)............................. 2-26 Figure:2-7 QUAD CHANNEL Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram(Sheet 1 of 2) ................................................................................................................................2-27 Figure:2-7 QUAD CHANNEL Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram(Sheet 2 of 2) ................................................................................................................................2-28 Figure:3-1 800/900 MHz Exciter (with cover removed)................................................................................. 5-2 Figure:3-2 1500 MHz Exciter, version TLN3428 (with top removed) ........................................................... 5-3 Figure:3-3 800 MHz QUAD Channel Exciter (with cover removed) ............................................................. 5-7 Figure:3-4 Exciter Functional Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 3-11 Figure:3-5 Exciter Functional Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 3-12 Figure:3-6 Exciter Functional Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 3-13 Figure:3-7 Exciter Functional Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 3-14 Figure:4-1 70W, 800 MHz PA – TLN3335 (with cover removed)................................................................. 6-2 Figure:4-2 60W, 900 MHz PA – CLN1355 (with cover removed)................................................................. 6-3 Figure:4-3 40W, 1500 PA (with cover removed)............................................................................................ 6-4 Figure:4-4 QUAD Channel PA (with cover removed).................................................................................... 6-5 Figure:4-5 TLF2020 (TTF1580B)  40 W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 1)................................................................................................................................ 4-13 Figure:4-6 TLN3335 (CTF1040) 70 W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 1)................................................................................................................................ 4-14 Figure:4-7 60W, 900 MHz Power Amplifier Functional Block Diagram(Sheet 1 of 1)................................................................................................................................ 4-15
 68P81099E10-D  1/15/2000 v EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Contents List of Figures Figure:4-8 Power Amplifier Functional Block Diagram............................................................................... 4-16 Figure:4-9 QUAD Channel Power Amplifier Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 1)............................. 6-17 Figure:5-1 DC Power Supply .......................................................................................................................... 7-2 Figure:5-2 Quad Carrier Power Supply........................................................................................................... 7-4 Figure:5-3 DC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram(Sheet 1 of 2) ..................................................................................................................................7-7 Figure:5-3 DC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram(Sheet 2 of 2) ..................................................................................................................................7-8 Figure:5-3 QUAD Channel DC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram(Sheet 1 of 2).................................................................................................................................. 7-9 Figure:5-3 QUAD Channel DC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram(Sheet 2 of 2) ................................................................................................................................7-10 Figure:6-1 AC Power Supply (front view) ...................................................................................................... 8-2 Figure:6-2 AC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)........................................................ 8-5 Figure:6-2 AC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram(Sheet 2 of 2) ..................................................................................................................................8-6 Figure:7-1 QUAD Channel Receiver (with cover removed)........................................................................... 9-1 Figure:7-2 Receiver (with top removed) ......................................................................................................... 9-8 Figure:7-3 3X Receiver (with cover removed).............................................................................................. 9-12 Figure:7-4 3X Receiver Functional Block Diagram...................................................................................... 9-17 Figure:7-5 Receiver Functional Block Diagram............................................................................................ 9-18 Figure:7-6 3X Receiver Functional Block Diagram...................................................................................... 9-19 Figure:7-7 Receiver Functional Block Diagram............................................................................................ 9-20 Figure:8-1 Procedure 1 Troubleshooting Flowchart...................................................................................... 10-3 Figure:8-2 Procedure 2 Troubleshooting Flowchart...................................................................................... 10-4 Figure:8-3 Transmitted Signal Spectrum (800 MHz BR) ........................................................................... 10-15 Figure:8-4 Transmitted Signal Spectrum (800 MHz BR) ........................................................................... 10-19 Figure:8-5 Transmitted Signal Spectrum (900 MHz BR) ........................................................................... 10-23 Figure:8-6 Transmitted Signal Spectrum (1500 MHz BR) ......................................................................... 10-27 Figure:8-7 Base Radio Backplane Connectors............................................................................................ 10-37 Figure:9-1 Procedure 1 Troubleshooting Flowchart...................................................................................... 11-3 Figure:9-2 Procedure 2 Troubleshooting Flowchart...................................................................................... 11-4 Figure:9-3 Quad Channel Spectrum (800 MHz BR)................................................................................... 11-16 Figure:9-4 Base Radio Backplane Connectors............................................................................................ 11-23 Figure:10-1 Quad Channel Spectrum (800 MHz BR)..................................................................................... 12-5
 vi 68P81099E10-D  4/1/2000 Contents EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 List of Tables List of Tables Table 1-1 Chapter Topics............................................................................................................................... 1-1 Table 1-2 BR General Specifications............................................................................................................. 1-5 Table 1-3 Transmit Specifications ................................................................................................................. 1-6 Table 1-4 Receive Specifications................................................................................................................... 1-6 Table 1-5 QUAD Channel BR General Specifications................................................................................ 1-10 Table 1-6 Transmit Specifications ............................................................................................................... 1-11 Table 1-7 Receive Specifications................................................................................................................. 1-11 Table 2-1 BR Controller Indicators................................................................................................................ 2-3 Table 2-2 BR Controller Controls.................................................................................................................. 2-4 Table 2-3 Pin-outs for the STATUS Connector............................................................................................. 2-5 Table 2-4 BR Controller Circuitry ................................................................................................................. 2-5 Table 2-5 Host Glue ASIC Functions ............................................................................................................ 2-6 Table 2-6 BR Controller Indicators.............................................................................................................. 2-13 Table 2-7 BR Controller Controls................................................................................................................ 2-14 Table 2-8 Pin-outs for the STATUS Connector........................................................................................... 2-15 Table 2-9 BR Controller Circuitry ............................................................................................................... 2-15 Table 3-1 Exciter Circuitry............................................................................................................................. 5-4 Table 3-2 Exciter Circuitry............................................................................................................................. 5-8 Table 4-1 Power Amplifier Circuitry............................................................................................................. 6-6 Table 5-1 DC Power Supply Indicators ......................................................................................................... 7-1 Table 5-2 DC Power Supply Specifications................................................................................................... 7-2 Table 5-3 DC Power Supply Circuitry........................................................................................................... 7-3 Table 5-4 DC Power Supply Indicators ......................................................................................................... 7-5 Table 5-5 DC Power Supply Specifications................................................................................................... 7-5 Table 5-6 DC Power Supply Circuitry........................................................................................................... 7-6 Table 6-1 AC Power Supply Indicators ......................................................................................................... 8-1 Table 6-2 AC Power Supply Specifications................................................................................................... 8-2 Table 6-3 AC Power Supply Circuitry........................................................................................................... 8-3 Table 7-1 Receiver FRUs............................................................................................................................... 9-2 Table 7-2 800 MHz Base Radio Receiver Board/BR Backplane Compatibility ........................................... 9-2 Table 7-3 900 MHz Base Radio Receiver Board/BR Backplane Compatibility ........................................... 9-2 Table 7-4 Receiver ROM Compatibility........................................................................................................ 9-3 Table 7-5 Receiver Circuitry.......................................................................................................................... 9-5 Table 7-6 Receiver Circuitry and Functions .................................................................................................. 9-9 Table 7-7 Receiver Circuitry........................................................................................................................ 9-14 Table 8-1 Recommended Test Equipment................................................................................................... 10-2 Table 8-2 40W, 800 MHz PA Transmitter Parameters.............................................................................. 10-13
 68P81099E10-D  4/1/2000 vii EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Contents List of Tables Table 8-3 70W, 800 MHz PA Transmitter Parameters.............................................................................. 10-17 Table 8-4 60W, 900 MHz PA – CLN1355 Transmitter Parameters.......................................................... 10-21 Table 8-5 40W, 1500 MHz PA Transmitter Parameters............................................................................ 10-25 Table 8-6 Base Radio Backplane Connectors............................................................................................ 10-35 Table 8-7 Color Codes for RF Connections on Rear of Base Radio.......................................................... 10-37 Table 8 P1 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-38 Table 9 P1 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-38 Table 10 P2 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-39 Table 11 P3 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-39 Table 12 P2 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-40 Table 13 P3 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-40 Table 14 P5 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-40 Table 15 P6 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-41 Table 16 P7 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-42 Table 17 P8 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-43 Table 18 P13 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................. 10-43 Table 19 SMA Connectors- Receivers...................................................................................................... 10-43 Table 20 Blind Mates - BRC..................................................................................................................... 10-43 Table 21 Blind Mates - Exciter................................................................................................................. 10-43 Table 22 Blind Mates - PA ....................................................................................................................... 10-44 Table 23 P9 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-44 Table 8-24 Base Radio Signal Descriptions................................................................................................. 10-47 Table 9-1 Recommended Test Equipment................................................................................................... 11-2 Table 9-2 QUAD BRTransmitter Parameters ............................................................................................ 11-14 Table 9-3 Backplane Connectors ............................................................................................................... 11-22 Table 9-9 RX1 P2 Pinout, Signal and Power............................................................................................. 11-26 Table 9-10 RX1 P3 Pinout, RF Input and Output Connection..................................................................... 11-26 Table 9-11 RX2 P4 Pinout, Signal and Power............................................................................................. 11-27 Table 9-12 RX2 P5 Pinout, RF Input and Output Connection..................................................................... 11-27 Table 9-13 RX3 P6 Pinout, Signal and Power............................................................................................. 11-28 Table 9-14 RX3 P7 Pinout, RF Input and Output Connection..................................................................... 11-28 Table 9-15 RX4 P8 Pinout, Signal and Power............................................................................................. 11-29 Table 9-16 RX4 P9 Pinout, RF Input and Output Connection..................................................................... 11-29 Table 9-17 PA P10 Pinout, Signal and Power.............................................................................................. 11-30
 viii 68P81099E10-D  4/1/2000 Contents EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 This Page IntentionallyLeft Blank
 68P81099E10-D  4/1/2000 ix EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Foreword Foreword About This Manual Volume 2 of the Enhanced Base Transceiver System (EBTS) manual,  Base Radios , provides the experienced service technician with an overview of the EBTS operation and functions, and contains information regarding the 800 MHz, 900 MHz, or 1500 MHz base radios.   The EBTS System has three major components: ❐ integrated Site Controller (iSC) ❐ Base Radios (BRs) ❐ RF Distribution System (RFDS)Installation and testing is described in Volume 1,  System Installation and Testing , and RFDS are described in Volume 3,  RF Distribution Systems (RFDS) . Detailed information about the iSC is contained in the  iSC Supplement Manual, 68P81098E05 .The information in this manual is current as of the printing date.  If changes to this manual occur after the printing date, they will be documented and issued as Schaumburg Manual Revisions (SMRs).  Target Audience The target audience of this document includes Þeld service technicians responsible for installing, maintaining, and troubleshooting the EBTS. In keeping with MotorolaÕs Þeld replaceable unit (FRU) philosophy, this manual provides sufÞcient functional information to the FRU level. Please refer to the appropriate section of this manual for removal and replacement instructions.
 x 68P81099E10-D  4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Foreword Maintenance Philosophy The EBTS has been designed using a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) maintenance concept.  To minimize system down time, faulty FRUs may be quickly and easily replaced with replacement FRUs.  This helps to restore normal system operation quickly.Due to the high percentage of surface mount components and multi-layer circuit boards, Þeld repair is discouraged.  Faulty or suspectFRUs should be returned to the Motorola Customer Support Center for further troubleshooting and repair.Each FRU has a bar code label attached to its front panel.  This label identiÞes a sequential serial number for the FRU.  Log this number whenever contacting the Motorola Customer Support Center.  For complete information on ordering replacement FRUs, or instructions on how to return faulty FRUs for repair, contact: Nippon Motorola LTD.        OR Motorola Customer Support CenterTokyo Service Center 1311 East Algonquin Road044-366-8860 Schaumburg, Illinois 60196(800) 448-3245 or (847) 576-7300 Technical Support Service Motorola provides technical support services for installation, optimization, and maintenance of its Þxed network equipment. Before calling the Motorola Customer Support Center, please note the following information: ❐ Where the system is located. ❐ The date the system was put into service. ❐ A brief description of problem.  ❐ Any other unusual circumstances.
 68P81099E10-D  4/1/2000 xi EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios General Safety Information General Safety Information The United States Department of Labor, through the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA), has established an electromagnetic energy safety standard which applies to the use of this equipment. Proper use of this radio will result in exposure below the OSHA limit, however, this applies only within the United States of America. Obey all electromagnetic energy safety standards that have been established by your local governing body.The following precautions are always recommended: ❐ DO NOT operate the transmitter of a mobile radio when someone outside the vehicle is within two feet (0.6 meter) of the antenna. ❐ DO NOT operate the transmitter of a Þxed radio (base station, microwave and rural telephone rf equipment) or marine radio when someone is within two feet (0.6 meter) of the antenna. ❐ DO NOT operate the transmitter of any radio unless all RF connectors are secure and any open connectors are properly terminated. ❐ DO NOT operate this equipment near electrical caps or in an explosive atmosphere.All equipment must be properly grounded according to Motorola installation instructions for safe operation.All equipment should be serviced only by a qualiÞed technician.Refer to the appropriate section of the product service manual for additional pertinent safety information.WARNING! POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD. BEFORE ATTEMPTING REMOVAL OR INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT, MAKE SURE THE PRIMARY POWER AND  BATTERIES ARE DISCONNECTED. Refer to publication 68P81106E84, Safe Handling of CMOS Integrated Circuit Devices, for more detailed information on this subject.
 xii 68P81099E10-D  4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 This Page IntentionallyLeft Blank
  68P81095E02-D 11/9/2000-UP 1-1 Network Solutions Sector 1301 E. Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196 1   800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Overview Overview This section provides technical information for the 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio (BR). Table 1-1 describes covered topics.  Table 1-1   Chapter Topics Chapter Page Description Single Carrier Base Radio Overview 1-3 Provides an overview of the BR, performance speciÞcations, and overall theory of operationQUAD Channel Base Radio Overview 1-8 Provides an overview of the QUAD Channel BR, performance speciÞcations, and overall theory of operationBase Radio Controller 2-1 Describes the functions and characteristics of the Base Radio Controller (BRC) moduleExciter 3-1 Describes the functions and characteristics of the Exciter modulePower AmpliÞer 4-1 Describes the functions and characteristics of Single Channel and QUAD Channel Power AmpliÞer modulesDC Power Supply 5-21 Describes functions and characteristics of DC Power Supply modules for Single Channel andQUAD Channel Base RadiosAC Power Supply 6-33 Describes the functions and characteristics of the AC Power Supply module
 1-2 68P81095E02-D 11/9/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2NOTE The Þrst section covers the 800 MHz, 900 MHz and 1500 MHz versions of the Base Radio (BR).  Generalinformation for all versions appears here. The text notes information speciÞc to the 800 MHz , 900  MHz or 1500 MHz BR.NOTE For QUAD Channel BR use, all Single Carrier BR modules have undergone a redesign process. Single Carrier BR modules are incompatible with the QUAD Channel BR. QUAD Channel BR modules are incompatible with the Single Carrier BR.Do not try to insert QUAD Channel BR modules into a Single Carrier BR or Single Carrier BR modules into a  QUAD Channel BR. Receiver 7-39 Describes the functions and characteristics of the 800 MHz and 900 MHz 3X Receiver modulesTroubleshooting Single Channel Base Radios 8-1  Provides troubleshooting procedures, replacement procedures, and receiver/transmitter veriÞcation tests for Single Channel Base RadiosBase Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures 8-5 Provides instructions and guidelines for Single Channel Base Radio and Base Radio FRU ReplacementStation VeriÞcation Procedures 8-9 Provides procedures for verifying station operation following Single Channel Base Radio repairsSingle Channel BR Backplane 8-35 DeÞnes the pinouts, connectors, and signal names for the Single Channel BR backplaneTroubleshooting QUAD Channel Base Radios 9-1 Provides troubleshooting procedures, replacement procedures, and receiver/transmitter veriÞcation tests for QUAD Channel base radiosBase Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures 9-5 Provides instructions and guidelines for QUAD Channel Base Radio and Base Radio FRU ReplacementStation VeriÞcation Procedures 9-10 Provides procedures for verifying station operation following QUAD Channel Base Radio repairsQUAD Channel BR Backplane 9-22 DeÞnes the pinouts, connectors, and signal names for the QUAD Channel BR backplaneAcronyms A-39 DeÞnes technical terms that appear in this manual Table 1-1   Chapter Topics Chapter Page Description
 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 1-3 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Single Carrier Base Radio Overview Single Carrier Base Radio Overview The BR provides reliable digital BR capabilities in a compact software-controlled design. Increased channel capacity is provided through voice compression techniques and Time Division Multiplexing (TDM). The BR contains the Þve FRUs listed below: ❐ Base Radio Controller (BRC) ❐ Exciter ❐ Power AmpliÞer ❐ Power Supply (AC/DC) ❐ Receiver The modular design of the BR also offers increased shielding and provides easy handling. All FRUs connect to the backplane through blindmate connectors.  Figure 1-1 shows the front view of the BR.EBTS282101497JNMCONTROLRESETBR PS EX PA CTL R1 R2 R3STATUSPOWER AMPLIFIERPOWER SUPPLY3X RECEIVERINSERT ONLY IN SLOT RX2 WITH BACKPLANE 0183625XEXCITERFigure:1-1Base Radio (Typical)
 1-4 68P81095E02-D 11/9/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Single Carrier Base Radio Overview Controls and Indicators The Power Supply and BRC contain controls and indicators that provide a means for monitoring various status and operating conditions of the BR, and also aid in fault isolation.  The controls and indicators for both modules are discussed in the Power Supply and BRC sections of this chapter.The Power Supply contains two front panel indicators; the BRC contains eight front panel indicators.  The Power Supply contains a power switch used to apply power to the BR.  The BRC contains a RESET switch used to reset the BR.  Performance Specifications General Specifications Table 1-2 lists general speciÞcations for the BR. Table 1-2   BR General Specifications Specification Value or Range Dimensions:HeightWidthDepthWeight5 EIA Rack Units (RU)19" (482.6 mm)16.75" (425 mm)76  lbs. (34 kg)Operating Temperature 32û to 104û F (0û to 40û C)Storage Temperature -22û to 140û F (-30û to 60û C)Rx Frequency Range:800 MHz iDEN900 MHz iDEN1500 MHz iDEN806 - 821 MHz896 - 901 MHz1453 - 1465 MHzTx Frequency Range:800 MHz iDEN900 MHz iDEN1500 MHz iDEN851 - 866 MHz935 - 940 MHz1501 - 1513 MHzTx Ð Rx Spacing:800 MHz iDEN900 MHz iDEN1500 MHz iDEN45 MHz39 MHz48 MHzChannel Spacing 25 kHzFrequency Generation SynthesizedDigital Modulation M-16QAMPower Supply Inputs:Vac (option)Vdc90 - 140/180 - 230 Vac (@ 47 - 63 Hz)-48 Vdc (41 - 60 Vdc)Diversity Branches Up to 3
 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 1-5 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Single Carrier Base Radio Overview Transmit Specifications Table 1-3 lists transmit speciÞcations for the BR. Receive Specifications  Table 1-4 lists the receive speciÞcations.   Table 1-3   Transmit Specifications   Specification Value or Range Average Power Output:(800 MHz) 40 W PA (800 MHz) 70 W PA(900 MHz) 60 W PA(1500 MHz) 40 W PA2 - 40 W4 - 70 W5 - 60 W10 - 40 WTransmit Bit Error Rate (BER) 0.01%Occupied Bandwidth 18.5 kHzFrequency Stability * 1.5 ppmRF Input Impedance 50  Ω  (nom.)FCC Designation (FCC Rule Part 90):(800 MHz) 40 W PA(800 MHz) 70 W PA(900 MHz) 60 W PA ABZ89FC5772ABZ89FC5763ABZ89FC5791 * Stability without site reference connected to station. Table 1-4   Receive Specifications  Specification Value or Range Static Sensitivity  :800 MHz BR 900 MHz BR 1500 MHz BR-108 dBm (BER = 8%)-109 dBm (BER = 10%)-98 dBm (BER = 1%) BER Floor (BER = 0.01%) ≥  -80 dBmIF Frequencies1st IF (All bands):2nd IF:800/900 MHz 1500 MHz73.35 MHz (1st IF)450 kHz (2nd IF)455 kHz (2nd IF)Frequency Stability * 1.5 ppmRF Input Impedance 50  Ω  (nom.)FCC Designation (FCC Rule Part 15):800 MHz BR 900 MHz BRABZ89FR5762ABZ89FR5792 † Measurement referenced from single receiver input port of BR.* Stability without site reference connected to station.
 1-6 68P81095E02-D 11/9/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Single Carrier Base Radio OverviewNOTE FCC Compliance Notice : The Base Radio (BR) is FCC Compliant only when used in conjunction with Motorola supplied RF Distribution Systems.  Motorola does not recommend that this BR be used without a Motorola approved RF Distribution System.  It is the customerÕs responsibility to Þle for FCC approval if the BR is used with a non-Motorola supplied RF  Distribution System. Theory of Operation The BR operates in conjunction with other site controllers and equipment that are properly terminated. The following description assumes such a conÞguration. Figures 1-3 and 1-4 show an overall block diagram of the BR.Power is applied to the AC Power or DC Power inputs located on the BR backplane.  The DC Power input is connected if -48 Vdc or batteries are used in the site.  The AC Power input is used when 120/240 Vac service is used as a power source within the site. Power is applied to the BR by setting the Power Supply power switch to the on position.  Upon power-up, the BR performs self-diagnostic tests to ensure the integrity of the unit.  These tests are primarily conÞned to the BRC and include memory and Ethernet veriÞcation routines. After the self-diagnostic tests are complete, the BR reports any alarm conditions present on any of its modules to the site controller via Ethernet.  Alarm conditions may also be veriÞed locally using service computer and the STATUS port located on the front of the BRC.The software resident in EPROM on the BRC registers the BR with the site controller via Ethernet.  Once registered, the BR software is downloaded via Ethernet and is executed from RAM.  Operating parameters for the BR are included in this download.  This software allows the BR to perform call processing functions. The BR operates in a TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access) mode.  This mode, combined with voice compression techniques, provides an increased channel capacity ratio of as much as 6 to 1.  Both the receive and transmit signals of the BR are divided into 6 individual time slots.  Each receive slot has a corresponding transmit slot; this pair of slots comprises a logical RF channel. The BR uses diversity reception for increased coverage area and improved quality.  The Receiver module within the BR contains up to three receivers.  Two Receivers are used with two-branch diversity sites, and three Receivers are used with three-branch diversity sites.
 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 1-7 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Single Carrier Base Radio Overview All Receivers within a given BR are programmed to the same receive frequency.  The signals from each receiver are fed to the BRC where a diversity combining algorithm is performed on the signals.  The resultant signal is processed for error correction and then sent to the site controller via Ethernet with the appropriate control information regarding its destination.The transmit section of the BR is comprised of two separate FRUs, the Exciter and Power AmpliÞer (PA).  Several PA FRUs are available, covering different applications and power levels; these are individually discussed as applicable in later subsections.The Exciter processes the information to transmit from the BRC in the proper modulation format.  This low level signal is sent to the PA where it is ampliÞed to the desired output power level.  The PA is a continuous keyed linear ampliÞer.  A power control routine monitors the output power of the BR and adjusts it as necessary to maintain the proper output level.
 1-8 68P81095E02-D 11/9/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 QUAD Channel Base Radio Overview QUAD Channel Base Radio Overview The QUAD Channel BR provides reliable, digital BR capabilities in a compact, software-controlled design. Voice compression techniques, time division multiplexing (TDM) and multi-carrier operation provide increased channel capacity. The QUAD Channel BR contains the Þve FRUs listed below: ❐ QUAD Channel EX / Cntl ❐ QUAD Channel Power AmpliÞer ❐ QUAD Channel Power Supply (DC) ❐ QUAD Channel Receiver  (qty 4)The modular design of the QUAD Channel BR also offers increased shielding and provides easy handling. All FRUs connect to the backplane through blindmate connectors. Figure 1-2 shows the front view of the BR.Figure:1-2QUAD Channel Base Radio (Typical)
 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 1-9 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios QUAD Channel Base Radio Overview Controls and Indicators Power Supply and EX / CNTL  controls and indicators monitor BR status and operating conditions, and also aid in fault isolation. The Power Supply and EX / CNTL sections of this chapter discuss controls and indicators for both modules.The Power Supply has two front panel indicators. The EX / CNTL has twelve front panel indicators. The Power Supply power switch applies power to the BR. The EX / CNTL RESET switch resets the BR.  Performance Specifications General Specifications Table 1-5 lists general speciÞcations for the BR. Table 1-5   QUAD Channel BR General Specifications Specification Value or Range Dimensions:HeightWidthDepthWeight5 EIA Rack Units (RU)19" (482.6 mm)16.75" (425 mm)91 lbs. (40 kg)Operating Temperature 32û to 104û F (0û to 40û C)Storage Temperature -22û to 140û F (-30û to 60û C)Rx Frequency Range:800 MHz iDEN 806 - 825 MHzTx Frequency Range:800 MHz iDEN 851 - 870 MHzTx Ð Rx Spacing:800 MHz iDEN 45 MHzCarrier Spacing 25 kHzCarrier Capacity a a. Multi-carrier operation must utilize adjacent, contiguous RF carriers. 1, 2, 3 or 4Frequency Generation SynthesizedDigital Modulation QPSK, M-16QAM, and M-64QAMPower Supply Inputs:Vdc -48 Vdc (41 - 60 Vdc)Diversity Branches Up to 3
 1-10 68P81095E02-D 11/9/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 QUAD Channel Base Radio Overview Transmit Specifications Table 1-6 lists the BR transmit speciÞcations. Receive Specifications Table 1-7 lists the receive speciÞcations.      Table 1-6   Transmit Specifications   Specification Value or Range Average Power Output:(800 MHz)Single Carrier(800 MHz) Dual Carrier(800 MHz) Triple Carrier(800 MHz) QUAD Channel Total PA                        Per Carrier5 - 52 W                          5 - 52 W5 - 52 W                          2.5 - 26 W5 - 48 W                           1.7 - 16 W5 - 42 WTransmit Bit Error Rate (BER) 0.01%Occupied Bandwidth 18.5 kHzFrequency Stability * 1.5 ppmRF Input Impedance 50  Ω  (nom.)FCC Designation (FCC Rule Part 90):(800 MHz) QUAD Channel  PA ABZ89FC5794 * Transmit frequency stability locks to an external site refernce, which controls ultimate frequency stability to a level of 50 ppb. Table 1-7   Receive Specifications  Specification Value or Range Static Sensitivity  :800 MHz BR  -108 dBm (BER = 8%)BER Floor (BER = 0.01%) ≥  -80 dBmIF Frequencies1st IF (All bands):2nd IF:73.35 MHz (1st IF)450 kHz (2nd IF)Frequency Stability * 1.5 ppmRF Input Impedance 50  Ω  (nom.)FCC Designation (FCC Rule Part 15):800 MHz BR  ABZ89FR5793 † Measurement referenced from single receiver input port of BR.* Stability without site reference connected to station. Receive frequency stability locks to an external site refernce, which controls ultimate frequency stability to a level of 50 ppb.
 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 1-11 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios QUAD Channel Base Radio OverviewNOTE FCC Compliance Notice : The Base Radio (BR) is FCC Compliant only when used with Motorola-supplied RF Distribution Systems. Motorola does not recommend using this BR without a Motorola- approved RF Distribution System. If customer uses the BR with a non-Motorola supplied RF Distribution System, the customer is responsible for Þling for FCC  approval. Theory of Operation The QUAD Channel BR operates together with other site controllers and equipment that are properly terminated. The following description assumes such a conÞguration. Figures 1-5 show an overall block diagram of the QUAD Channel BR.Power is applied to the DC Power inputs located on the QUAD Channel BR backplane. The DC Power input is connected if -48 Vdc or batteries are used in the site.Power is applied to the BR by setting the Power Supply power switch to the on position. Upon power-up, the QUAD Channel BR performs self-diagnostic tests to ensure the integrity of the unit. These tests, which include memory and Ethernet veriÞcation routines, primarily examine the EX / CN TL. After completing self-diagnostic tests, the QUAD Channel BR reports alarm conditions on any of its modules to the site controller via Ethernet. Alarm conditions may also be veriÞed locally. Local veriÞcation involves using the service computer and the STATUS port located on the front of the QUAD Channel EX / CNTL.The software resident in FLASH on the EX / CNTL registers the BR with the site controller via Ethernet. After BR registration on initial power-up, the BR software  downloads via Ethernet and executes from RAM. The download includes operating parameters for the QUAD Channel BR. These parameters allow the QUAD Channel BR to perform call processing functions. After software downloads to the BR via Ethernet, FLASH memory stores the software object. Upon future power-ups, the software object in FLASH loads into RAM for execution.The BR operates in a TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access) mode. This mode, combined with voice compression techniques, increases channel capacity by a ratio of as much as six to one. TDMA divides both the receive and transmit signals of the BR into six individual time slots. Each receive slot has a corresponding transmit slot. This pair of slots comprises a logical RF channel.
 1-12 68P81095E02-D 11/9/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 QUAD Channel Base Radio Overview The BR uses diversity reception for increased coverage area and improved quality. The Receiver modules within the QUAD Channel BR contain three receiver paths. Two-branch diversity sites use two Receiver paths, and three-branch diversity sites use three Receiver paths. All Receiver paths within a given Receiver module are programmed to the same receive frequency. Signals from each receiver arrive at the EX / CNTL module. This module performs a diversity combining algorithm on the signals. The resultant signal undergoes an error-correction process. Then, via Ethernet, the site controller acquires the signal, along with control information about signal destination.Two separate FRUs comprise the transmit section of the QUAD Channel BR. These are the Exciter portion of the EX / CNTL and the Power AmpliÞer (PA). The Exciter processes commands from the CNTL, assuring transmission in the proper modulation format. Then the low-level signal enters the PA. The PA ampliÞes this signal to the desired output power level. The PA is a continuously keyed linear ampliÞer. A power control routine monitors the output power of the BR. The routine adjusts the power as necessary to maintain the proper output level.
 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 1-13 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios QUAD Channel Base Radio Overview
 1-14 68P81095E02-D 11/9/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 QUAD Channel Base Radio Overview This Page IntentionallyLeft Blank
 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 1-15 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Base Radio OverviewPOWER AMPLIFIER MODULETO/FROMETHERNETBASE RADIO CONTROLLERMODULEEXCITER MODULEDC POWER SUPPLY MODULESERIAL BUSTO/FROMSTATUSPORT(RS-232)TO/FROMRS-232 PORT(ON BACKPLANE)16.8 MHZ5 MHZSPI BUS5 MHZEXTERNALREFERENCEFINALLINEARAMPS SPLITTER LINEARDRIVERADDRESS DECODE,MEMORY, A/D CONVERTERADDRESS DECODE,MEMORY, A/D CONVERTERFROMRFDS(RECEIVERANTENNA)#33X RECEIVER MODULEMIXERDSP BUSLPF/PRESELECT/PREAMP/IMAGE FILTERVCO/SYNTHADDRESS DECODE,MEMORY,A/D CONVERTERNON-VOLATILEMEMORY(EEPROM,EPROM)DRAMSRAMHOSTµµPETHERNETINTERFACE HOSTGLUEASICTRANSMITDSPRECEIVEDSPSCISSIPLL/VCOSPI BUS2.1 MHZCOMBINERLINEAR RFAMPLIFIEREXCITERICIF IN IF OUTTRANLINICINPUT FILTERBOARDCLOCKGENERATORCIRCUITRY START-UPINVERTERCIRCUITRY133 KHZ267 KHZ+14.2 VINVERTERCIRCUITRY133 KHZDIAGNOSTICSCIRCUITRY+14.2 VDCTO BACKPLANE+5 VDCTO BACKPLANE+28 VDCTO BACKPLANEEXTERNALDC INPUT41 - 72 VDCRF OUTSPI BUSSPI BUSSPI BUSSPI BUS2.1 MHZSPI BUSDATA/CLOCKDATA/CLOCKRF  INRF  OUTRF FEEDBACKFEEDBACK INDIGITALATTEN.CIRCUITAGCSPI BUSRF INCUSTOMRECEIVERICEBTS284120497JNMTORFDS(TRANSMITANTENNA)MAIN INVERTERCIRCUITRY+5 VINVERTERCIRCUITRYTISICFROMRFDS(RECEIVERANTENNA)#2MIXERDSP BUSLPF/PRESELECT/PREAMP/IMAGE FILTERRF  INDIGITALATTEN.CIRCUITCUSTOMRECEIVERICFROMRFDS(RECEIVERANTENNA)#1MIXERDSP BUSLPF/PRESELECT/PREAMP/IMAGE FILTERRF  INDIGITALATTEN.CIRCUITCUSTOMRECEIVERICBANDPASSFILTERBANDPASSFILTERBANDPASSFILTERIFAMPIFAMPIFAMPBANDPASSFILTERBANDPASSFILTERBANDPASSFILTER3-WAYSPLITTERNOTES:1. 2-Branch systems must have a 50Ω load (P/N 5882106P03) installed on Antenna Port #3.2. Set the RX_FRU_CONFIG parameter as follows:2-Branch Systems: 123-Branch Systems: 1233. Where two frequencies are given, frequency without parentheses applies to 800 MHz BR only and frequency with parentheses applies to 900 MHz BR only.970 MHZ(1025 MHZ)VCO/SYNTHFREQUENCYDOUBLER237 MHZ(180.6 MHZ)VCOFigure:1-3800/900 MHz Base Radio Functional Block Diagram800 MHz And 900 MHzBase RadioFunctional Block Diagram
 1-16 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Base Radio Overview1500 MHz Base RadioFunctional Block DiagramPOWER AMPLIFIER MODULETLN3426TO/FROMETHERNETBASE RADIO CONTROLLERMODULECLN1469/TLN3425EXCITER MODULETLN3428POWER SUPPLY MODULETLN3429/TLN3339/TLN3338SERIAL BUSTRANSMITANTENNATO/FROMSERVICECOMPUTERTO/FROMSYNC MODEM16.8 MHZ5 MHZSPI BUS5 MHZEXTERNALREFERENCEFINALLINEARAMPFINALLINEARAMPSPLITTER LINEARDRIVERADDRESS DECODE,MEMORY, A/D CONVERTERADDRESS DECODE,MEMORY, A/D CONVERTER700 MHZVCO/SYNTHFREQUENCYDOUBLERRECEIVEANTENNARECEIVER MODULETLN3427MIXERDSP BUSLPF/PRESELECT/PERAMP/IMAGE FILTERSYNTH/VCOBANDPASSFILTERADDRESS DECODE,MEMORY,A/D CONVERTERNON-VOLATILEMEMORY(EEPROM, SRAM,EPROM)DRAMHOSTµPETHERNETINTERFACEHOSTASIC TRANSMITDSPRECEIVEDSPSCISSIPLL/VCOSPI BUS2.1 MHZCOMBINERLINEAR RFAMPLIFIERAGCCIRCUITEXCITERICIF IN IF OUTTRANLINIC236 MHZVCOMAIN INVERTERCIRCUITRYINPUT FILTERBOARDCLOCKGENERATORCIRCUITRY START-UPINVERTERCIRCUITRY133 KHZ267 KHZ+14.2 VINVERTERCIRCUITRY+5 VINVERTERCIRCUITRY133 KHZ (TLN3338)67 KHZ  (TLN3429/TLN3339)DIAGNOSTICSCIRCUITRY+14.2 VDCTO BACKPLANE+5 VDCTO BACKPLANE+28 VDCTO BACKPLANETO/FROM STORAGEBATTERYAC INPUT47 - 63 HZ90V/264VRF OUTSPI BUSSPI BUSSPI BUSSPI BUS2.1 MHZSPI BUSDATA/CLOCKSPI BUSDATA/CLOCKRF  INRF  OUTRF FEEDBACK FEEDBACK INERRORCORRECTIONDSP(TLN3425 ONLY)CORRECTION SIGNALS2X INJECTIONAMPDIGITALATTEN.CIRCUITRECEIVER MODULERECEIVER MODULEAGCSPI BUSIFAMPBANDPASSFILTERRF INDSPGLUEASICCUSTOMRECEIVERICBattery Charging/Revert Circuitry is contained only in the TLN3429 and TLN3339 AC Power Supplies.*BATTERY CHARGING/REVERT CIRCUITRY*Figure:1-41500 MHz Base Radio Functional Block Diagram
 1-17 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Base Radio OverviewFigure:1-5800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Functional Block Diagram16.8MHz2.4MHz48MHzHost SPIHost SPI16.8MHzSTATUSPORTRS-2325 MHZEXTERNALREFERENCEETHERNET1PPS & SLOT TIMINGRX1 DATARX2 DATARX3 DATARX4 DATARx1&2Rx3&4POWER AMPLIFIER MODULETx_I Tx_QEXCITER-BASE RADIO CONTROLLERHOSTu’PSDRAMRECEIVEDSPETHERNETEEPROMFLASHPLL/VCOsTRANSMITDSPTISICTX RECLOCKBUFFERSRX SPIBASE RADIO CONTROLLERExciterIO LATCHESRECEIVEDSPINTERFACEADDRESS DECODE,MEMORY, ADCSPI BUSLINEARDRIVERFINALLINEARAMPSCOMBINERSPLITTERRF OUTTO RFDS(TX ANTENNA)DAC VCOs/SynthsIQODCTLINEAR RFAMPLIFIERRF INRF FEEDBACKDC POWER SUPPLY MODULEINPUT FILTERSTART-UPINVERTERCIRCUITRYEXTERNALDC INPUT41 - 60 VDCCLOCKGENERATOR133 KHZ 267 KHZ133 KHZ14.2 VCONVERTER3.3 VCONVERTER+28 VDCTO BACKPLANE+14.2 VDCTO BACKPLANE+3.3 VDCTO BACKPLANEMain ConverterMIXERIF FILTERAMP, AGCABACUSRECEIVERICLPF, AMP,FILTERMIXERIF FILTERAMP, AGCABACUSRECEIVERICLPF, AMP,FILTERMIXERIF FILTERAMP, AGCABACUSRECEIVERICLPF, AMP,FILTERRX INTERFACE,ADDRESS DECODE.MEMORY, DIAGNOSTICSPREAMPLIFIERSPLITTER/ BYPASSVCO SYNTHSPLITTERRF INFROM RFDS(BRANCH 2)MIXERIF FILTERAMP, AGCABACUSRECEIVERICLPF, AMP,FILTERMIXERIF FILTERAMP, AGCABACUSRECEIVERICLPF, AMP,FILTERMIXERIF FILTERAMP, AGCABACUSRECEIVERICLPF, AMP,FILTERRX INTERFACE,ADDRESS DECODE.MEMORY, DIAGNOSTICSPREAMPLIFIERSPLITTER/ BYPASSVCO SYNTHSPLITTERRF INFROM RFDS(BRANCH 3)MIXERIF FILTERAMP, AGCABACUSRECEIVERICLPF, AMP,FILTERMIXERIF FILTERAMP, AGCABACUSRECEIVERICLPF, AMP,FILTERMIXERIF FILTERAMP, AGCABACUSRECEIVERICLPF, AMP,FILTERRX INTERFACE,ADDRESS DECODE.MEMORY, DIAGNOSTICSPREAMPLIFIERSPLITTER/ BYPASSVCO SYNTHSPLITTERRF INFROM RFDS(BRANCH 1)RECEIVER 2RECEIVER 3RECEIVER 4RECEIVER 1MIXERIF FILTERAMP, AGCABACUSRECEIVERICLPF, AMP,FILTERMIXERIF FILTERAMP, AGCABACUSRECEIVERICLPF, AMP,FILTERMIXERIF FILTERAMP, AGCABACUSRECEIVERICLPF, AMP,FILTERRX INTERFACE,ADDRESS DECODE.MEMORY, DIAGNOSTICSPREAMPLIFIERSPLITTER/ BYPASSVCO SYNTHSPLITTERSPI BUSSPI BUSSPI BUSADDRESS DECODE,MEMORY, ADCQUAD RX IN DISTRIBUTION16.8MHz
 1-18 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Base Radio Overview
 68P81095E02-D   12/6/2000 2-1 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios   2   Base Radio Controller Overview This section provides technical information for the Base Radio Controller (BRC). Table 2-1 describes covered topics.  FRU Number to Kit Number Cross Reference Base Radio Controller (BRC) Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) are available for the iDEN EBTS. The FRU contains the BRC kit and required packaging. Table 2-2 provides a cross reference between BRC FRU numbers and kit numbers.  Table 2-1   Chapter Topics Chapter Page Description 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller Ð CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller Ð TLN34252-2 Describes the functions and characteristics of the Base Radio Controller (BRC) module for the single channel Base Radio (BR).800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller2-13 Describes the functions and characteristics of the Base Radio Controller (BRC) module for the QUAD channel Base Radio (BR).Single Channel Base Radio Controller 2-25 Functional Block Diagram for the Single Channel Base Radio Controller (BRC)QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller 2-29 Functional Block Diagram for the QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller (BRC) Table 2-2   FRU Number to Kit Number Cross Referece Description FRU Number Kit Number Single Channel Base Radio Controller(800/ 900/ 1500 MHz)TLN3334 CLN1469Single Channel Base Radio Controller(1500 MHz MCI)TLN3425 CLN1472QUAD Channel Exciter/Base Radio Controller (800 MHz)CLN1497 CLF1560
 2-2 68P81095E02-D 12/6/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425   800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469;1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425 Overview The Base Radio Controller (BRC) provides signal processing and operational control for other Base Radio modules. Figure 2-1 shows a top view of the BRC with the cover removed. The BRC module consists of two printed circuit boards (BRC board and LED/display board), a slide-in housing, and associated hardware.The BRC memory contains the operating software and codeplug. The software deÞnes operating parameters for the BR, such as output power and operating frequency. The BRC interconnects to the Base Radio backplane using one 96-pin, DIN connector and one blindmate, RF connector. Two Torx screws secure the BRC to the Base Radio chassis.NOTE BRC Modules with board level kit number CLN6989 require System Software Release version SR 3.3 or higher. Using these modules with System Software versions older than 3.3 causes a PENDULUM lock  error. The Base Radio will not function.Two BRC modules serve as the main controller for the 1500 MHz Base Radio. The standard model is the same module that the 800/900 MHz Base Radio uses. Model TLN3425 contains additional Digital Signal Processing power. This additional power supports applications that require a modiÞed error correction routine (available for speciÞc customers only). Figure 2-2 shows a top view of the BRC (model TLN3425) with the cover removed.
 68P81095E02-D   12/6/2000 2-3 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425  Figure:2-1Base Radio Controller, version CLN1469 (with cover removed)1.5GHZ-A859Figure:2-2Base Radio Controller, version TLN3425 (with cover removed)
 2-4 68P81095E02-D 12/6/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425   Controls and Indicators The BRC monitors the functions of other Base Radio modules. Front panel LEDs indicate the status of modules that the BRC monitors. Upon initial power-up, all front panel LEDs normally ßash three times. A RESET switch allows a manual reset of the Base Radio. Figure 2-3 shows the BRC front panel. Indicators Table 2-3 lists and describes the BRC LEDs.  Table 2-3   BR Controller Indicators  LED Color ModuleMonitored Condition Indications BR Green BR Solid (on) Station is keyedFlashing (on) Station is not keyedOff Station is out of service or power is removedPS Red Power SupplySolid (on) FRU failure indication - Power Supply has a major alarm, and is out of serviceFlashing (on) Power Supply has a minor alarm, and may be operating at reduced performanceOff Power Supply is operating normally (no alarms)EBTS316122796JNMCONTROLRESETBR PS EX PA CTL R1 R2 R3STATUSFigure:2-3BR Controller (Front View)
 68P81095E02-D   12/6/2000 2-5 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425   Controls Table 2-4 lists the controls and descriptions.  STATUS Connector Table 2-5 the pin-outs for the STATUS connector.  EX Red Exciter Solid (on) FRU failure indication - Exciter has a major alarm, and is out of serviceFlashing (on) Exciter has a minor alarm, and may be operating at reduced performanceOff Exciter is operating normally(no alarms)PA Red Power AmpliÞerSolid (on) FRU failure indication - PA has a major alarm, and is out of serviceFlashing (on) PA has a minor alarm and may be operating at reduced performanceOff PA is operating normally (no alarms)CTL Red Controller Solid (on) FRU failure indication - BRC has a major alarm, and is out of serviceFlashing (on) BRC has a minor alarm, and may be operating at reduced performanceOff BRC is operating normally (no alarms)R1R2R3Red Receiver #1, #2, or #3Solid (on) FRU failure indication - Receiver (#1, #2, or #3) has a major alarm, and is out of serviceFlashing (on) Receiver (#1, #2, or #3) has a minor alarm, and may be operating at reduced performanceOff Receiver (#1, #2, or #3) is operating normally (no alarms) Table 2-4   BR Controller Controls  Control Description RESET Switch A push-button switch used to manually reset the BR.STATUS connectorA 9-pin connector used for connection of a service computer. Provides a convenient means for testing and conÞguring. Table 2-3   BR Controller Indicators (Continued) LED Color ModuleMonitored Condition Indications
 2-6 68P81095E02-D 12/6/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425   Theory of Operation Table 2-6 brießy describes the BRC circuitry. Figures 2-6 and 2-7 are functional block diagrams of the Single Channel BRC.  Table 2-5   Pin-outs for the STATUS Connector Pin-out Signal 1CD2 TXD3 RXD4 not used5 GND6 not used7 CTS8RTS9 not used Table 2-6   BR Controller Circuitry Circuit Description Host Microprocessor and Host Glue ASICContains two integrated circuits that comprise the central controller of the BRC and station.Non-Volatile Memory Consists of: ¥ EPROMs containing the station operating software¥ one EEPROM containing the station codeplug dataVolatile Memory Contains DRAM to store station software that executes commands. Contains SRAM which the host microprocessor uses for general data space.Ethernet Interface Provides the BRC with a 10Base2 Ethernet communication port. The interface networks both control and compressed voice data.RS-232 Interface Provides the BRC with two independent RS-232 serial interfaces.Digital Signal Processors and TISICPerforms high-speed modulation/demodulation of compressed audio and signaling data.Station Reference Circuitry Generates the 16.8 MHz and 2.1 MHz reference signal used throughout the station.Input Ports  Contains two 16-line input buses. These buses receive miscellaneous inputs from the BR.Output Ports Contains three 16-line output buses. These buses provide a path for sending miscellaneous control signals to circuits throughout the BR.Remote Station Shutdown Provides software control to cycle power on the BR.
 68P81095E02-D   12/6/2000 2-7 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425   Host Microprocessor The host microprocessor is the the BRÕs main controller. The host operates at a clock speed of 16.5 MHz. The Host Glue ASIC provides this clock frequency. The processor controls Base Radio operation according to station software in non-volatile memory. Two EPROMs contain the station software. An EEPROM stores the station codeplug. Serial Communication Buses The microprocessor provides a general-purpose SCC2 serial communications bus.The SCC2 serial communications bus is an asynchronous RS-232 interface. The the BRC front panel includes a 9-pin, D-type   connector. This connector provides a port where service personnel may connect a service computer. The service computer allows downloading of application code or diagnostic software. Service personnel can perform programming and maintenance tasks via Man Machine Interface (MMI) commands. The interface between the SCC2 port and the front panel STATUS connector is via EIA-232 Bus Receivers/Drivers. Address and Data Bus The microprocessor has a 23-line address bus. The processor uses this bus to access non-volatile and DRAM memory. The processor also uses the bus to provide control for other BRC circuitry via memory mapping. A 16-line data bus transfers data to and from the BRC memory. Such bus transfers may involve other BRC circuitry, too. Buffers on the data bus allow transfers to and from non-volatile and DRAM memory. Host Glue ASIC The Host Microprocessor controls the operations of the Host Glue ASIC. Table 2-7 describes this ASICÕs functions. Table 2-7   Host Glue ASIC Functions Function Description SPI Bus Serves as a general-purpose, serial communications bus. Provides communications between the Host Microprocessor and other Base Radio modules.DRAM Controller Provides signals necessary to access and refresh DRAM memory.System Reset Generates a BRC Reset at power-up.Host Microprocessor ClockBuffers the 33 MHz crystal outputs. Performs a divide-by-2 operation. Outputs a 16.5 MHz clock signal for the Host Microprocessor.Address Decoding Decodes addresses from the Host Microprocessor. Generates corresponding chip-select signals for various BRC devices, such as: DRAM, EPROM, I/O Ports, DSPs, and internal Host Glue ASIC registers.Interrupt Controller Accepts interrupt signals from various BRC circuits (such as the DSPs). Organizes the interrupts based on hardware-deÞned priority ranking. Sends interrupt and priority level information to the Host Microprocessor (via IPL lines 1-3).
 2-8 68P81095E02-D 12/6/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425   Non-Volatile Memory The Base Radio software resides in two 512K x 8 byte EPROMs. The Host Microprocessor addresses these EPROMs via 19 of 23 host address bus lines. The host accesses EPROM data over the 16-line host data bus.The data that determines the station personality resides in an 8K x 8 byte codeplug EEPROM. The microprocessor addresses the EEPROM over 15 of 23 host address bus lines. The host accesses EEPROM data over the 16-line data bus. Stations ship with default data programmed into the codeplug. The BRC must download Þeld programming information from network and site controllers. This data includes operating frequencies and output power level. The station permits adjustment of many station parameters, but the station does not store adjustments. Refer to this manualÕs Software Commands chapter for additional information. Volatile Memory Each BRC contains 2MB of DRAM. The BRC downloads station software code into DRAM for station use. Since DRAM is volatile memory, it loses data during a system reset or power failure. DRAM also provides short-term storage for data generated and required during normal operation. The BRC performs read and write operations over the Host Address and Data buses. Read and write operations also involve column and row select lines. The Host Glue ASIC controls these lines. The Host Glue ASIC also controls address bus and column row signals. During normal operation, the address bus and column row signals sequentially refresh DRAM memory locations.The BRC also includes two 32K x 8 byte fast Static RAM (SRAM) ICs. The microprocessor accesses SRAM over the Data Bus and Host Address Bus. Access requires the entire Data Bus, and 15 of the Host Address BusÕ 23 lines.  Ethernet Interface The Ethernet Interface includes a Local Area Network (LAN) Controller. This LAN Controller is a 32-bit address, 16-bit data LAN coprocessor. The LAN coprocessor implements the CSMA/CD access method, which supports the IEEE 802.3 10Base2 standard. The LAN coprocessor communicates with the Host Microprocessor via DRAM. The LAN coprocessor uses 22 of its 32 address lines for the Ethernet interface.The LAN coprocessor supports all IEEE 802.3 Medium Access Control, including the following:  ❐ framing  ❐ preamble generation  ❐ stripping ❐ source address generation ❐ destination address checking
 68P81095E02-D   12/6/2000 2-9 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425   The LAN coprocessor receives commands from the CPU by reading a speciÞed memory block. The LAN ControllerÕs internal FIFOs optimize microprocessor bus performance. The LAN coprocessor includes an on-chip, Direct Memory Access (DMA) controller. The DMA controller automatically transfers data blocks (buffers and frames) from Ethernet to DRAM. These automatic data transfers relieve the host CPU of byte transfer overhead.The Ethernet Serial Interface works with the LAN coprocessor to perform these major functions: ❐ 10 MHz transmit clock generation (obtained by dividing the 20 MHz signal provided by an on-board crystal) ❐ Manchester encoding and decoding of frames ❐ electrical interface to the Ethernet transceiverAn isolation transformer provides high voltage protection. The transformer also isolates the Ethernet Serial Interface (ESI) and the transceiver. The pulse transformer has the following characteristics: ❐ Minimum inductance of 75  µ H ❐ 2000 V isolation between primary and secondary windings ❐ 1:1 Pulse Transformer The Coaxial Transceiver Interface (CTI) is a coaxial cable line driver/receiver for the Ethernet. CTI provides a 10Base2 connection via a coaxial connector on the board. This device minimizes the number of external components necessary for Ethernet operations. A DC/DC converter provides a constant voltage of -9 Vdc for the CTI. The converterÕs input source voltage is 5 Vdc. The CTI performs the following functions: ❐ Receives and transmits data to the Ethernet coaxial connection ❐ Reports any collision that it detects on the coaxial connection ❐ Disables the transmitter when packets are longer than the legal length (Jabber Timer) Digital Signal Processors The BRC includes a Receive Digital Signal Processor (RXDSP) and a Transmit Digital Signal Processor (TXDSP). These DSPs and related circuitry process compressed station transmit and receive audio or data. The related circuitry includes the TDMA Infrastructure Support IC (TISIC) and the TISIC Interface Circuitry. The DSPs only accepts input and output signals in digitized form.The inputs are digitized receiver signals. The outputs are digitized voice audio and data (modulation signals). The output DSP sends these signals to the Exciter. DSPs communicate with the Microprocessor via an 8-bit host data bus. This bus is on the Host Processor side. For all DSPs, interrupts drive communication.
 2-10 68P81095E02-D 12/6/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425   The RXDSP operates from a 40 MHz clock provided by an on-board crystal. The RXDSP accepts redigitized signal from the receivers. The   RXDSP also provides address and data buses. These buses receive digitized audio from the TISIC.The DSP program and signal processing algorithms reside in three 32K x 8 SRAM ICs. The RXDSP accesses this software there. The RXDSP communicates with the host bus via an 8-bit interface. The Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) port offers a serial data path to the TXDSP. The Serial Communications Interface (SCI) port provides a serial control path from the TXDSP. The TXDSP operates at a clock speed of 40 MHz, provided by a clock oscillator. The TXDSP sends the digitized signal to the TISIC. The TSCI then passes the signal to the Exciter. The TXDSP contains its own address and data buses. It uses these buses to access its DSP program and signal processing algorithms in local memory. The TXDSP memory consists of six 32K x 8 SRAM ICs. The TXDSP communicates with the host bus via an 8-bit interface. Error Correction Digital Signal Processor  ( TLN3425 Only) The Error Correction Digital Signal Processor   (U30) in the Model TLN3425A operates at a clock speed of 60 MHz. An on-board   oscillator (Y100) operates at 10 MHz. Circuitry inside the ECDSP multiplies this frequency to generate the required clock signal. Decoding is the main function of the Error Correction Digital Signal Processor (ECDSP). The ECDSP accepts data from the Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) bus. The ECDSP performs various algorithms on the signal. Then the signal enters the TXDSP via the SSI bus.The ECDSP contains its own address and data buses. It uses these buses to access its DSP program and signal processing algorithms in local memory. Two 32K x 8 SRAM ICs (U27 and U31) comprise the ECDSP memory. The ECDSP communicates with the host bus via an 8-bit interface.
 68P81095E02-D   12/6/2000 2-11 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425   TISIC The TISIC controls internal DSP operations. This circuit provides a number of functions, including the following: ❐ Interfaces with the DSPs via the DSP address and data buses. ❐Accepts a 16.8 MHz signal and a 1 PPS signal from Station Reference Circuitry.❐Outputs a 2.1 MHz reference signal used by the Exciter and Receivers.❐Outputs a 4.8 MHz reference signal used by the Exciter to clock data into the TRANLIN IC.❐Accepts differential data from the Receiver (RX1 through RX3) via interface circuitry.❐Accepts and sends serial data from the Receiver (RX1 through RX3) via the serial data bus.❐Accepts and formats differential data from the TXDSP for transmission to the Exciter via interface circuitry.❐Generates 15 ms and 7.5 ms ticks. These synchronize to the 1 PPS time mark from the iSC. The system routes these ticks to the TXDSP and RXDSP, respectively.❐Generates the Receive SSI (RXSSI) frame sync interrupt for the RXDSP.Station Reference CircuitryThe Station Reference Circuitry is a phase-locked loop (PLL). This PLL consists of a high-stability, Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator (VCXO) and a Phase Locked Loop IC. The iSCÕs GPS output connects to the 5 MHz/1 PPS A BNC connector on the EBTS junction panel.The PLL compares the reference frequency to the 16.8 MHz VCXO output. The PLL then generates a DC correction or control voltage. With the control voltage enable switch closed, the PLLÕs control voltage adjusts the VCXO frequency. This adjustment achieves a stability equivalent to that of the external 5 MHz frequency reference.The control voltage from the PLL continuously frequency-controls the VXCO. The VXCO outputs a 16.8 MHz clock signal, and applies the signal to the TISIC. The TISIC divides the 16.8 MHz signal by eight and outputs a 2.1 MHz signal. A splitter separates and buffers this signal. Then via the backplane, the output signal enters the Exciter and Receivers as a 2.1 MHz reference .The 4.8 MHz reference signal generated by the TISIC enters the Exciter module. There it clocks data into and out of the TRANLIN IC.
2-12 68P81095E02-D 12/6/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425 Input PortsTwo general purpose, 16-line input ports provide for various input signals from the BRC and station circuitry. These inputs connect to the Host Microprocessor. Input Port P0 -In and Port P1-In each consist of 16 lines. Via the backplane, these lines carry signals from BRC circuitry and other station modules. The buses communicate with the buffers to make data available to the Host Microprocessor via the Host Data Bus. The DIP switch and Station Reference Circuitry are typical inputs for these ports.Output PortsThree general purpose, 16-line output ports provide various control signals from the Host Microprocessor. Via the backplane, these output ports carry control signals to the BRC and station circuitry. Output ports P0-Out through Port P2-Out each consist of 16 lines. These lines derive from the Host Data Bus via latches. Typical control signals include front panel LED control signals and SPI peripheral address select lines.Remote Station ShutdownBRC circuitry can send a shutdown pulse to the Base Radio Power Supply. After receiving this pulse, the power supply cycles BR power. The shutdown affects 5.1 Vdc, 28.6 Vdc and 14.2 Vdc sources. The BRC produces the shutdown pulse by invoking software control signals. A remote site uses the shutdown function to perform a hard reset of all BR modules.
68P81095E02-D   12/6/2000 2-13EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller 800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio ControllerOverviewThe Base Radio Controller (BRC) provides signal processing and operational control for Base Radio modules. The BRC module consists of a printed circuit board, a slide-in housing, and associated hardware.The BRC memory contains the operating software and codeplug. The software deÞnes BR operating parameters, such as output power and operating frequency. The BRC connects to the Base Radio backplane with one 168-pin FutureBus+ connector and one blindmate RF connector. Two Torx screws secure the BRC in the Base Radio chassis. Figure 2-4 shows a top view of the BRC (model CLF6290A) with the cover removed.Controls and IndicatorsThe BRC monitors the functions of other Base Radio modules. The LEDs on the front panel indicate the status of BRC-monitored modules. All LEDs on the BRC front panel normally ßash three times upon initial power-up. A RESET switch Figure:2-4Base Radio Controller, version CLN1469 (with cover removed)
2-14 68P81095E02-D 12/6/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller allows a manual reset of the Base Radio. Figure 2-5 shows the front panel of the BRC.IndicatorsTable 2-8 lists and describes the BRC LEDs. Table 2-8  BR Controller Indicators LED Color ModuleMonitored Condition IndicationsPS Red Power SupplySolid (on) FRU failure indication - Power Supply has a major alarm, and is out of serviceFlashing (on) Power Supply has a minor alarm, and may be operating at reduced performanceOff Power Supply is operating normally (no alarms)EXBRC Red Controller/ExciterSolid (on) FRU failure indication - Controller/Exciter has a major alarm, and is out of service (Note: Upon power-up of the BR, this LED indicates a failed mode until BR software achieves a known state of operation.)Flashing (on) Controller/Exciter has a minor alarm, and may be operating at reduced performanceOff Controller/Exciter is operating normally (no alarms)PA Red Power AmpliÞerSolid (on) FRU failure indication - PA has a major alarm, and is out of serviceFlashing (on) PA has a minor alarm, and may be operating at reduced performanceOff PA is operating normally (no alarms)REF Red Controller Station ReferenceSolid (on) FRU failure indication - Controller Station Reference has a major alarm, and is out of serviceFlashing (on) BRC has a minor alarm, and may be operating in a marginal regionOff BRC is operating normally (no alarms)Figure:2-5BR Controller (Front View)
68P81095E02-D   12/6/2000 2-15EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller ControlsTable 2-9 lists the controls and descriptions. STATUS ConnectorTable 2-10 the pin-outs for the STATUS connector. RX1RX2RX3RX4Red Receiver #1, #2, #3, or #4Solid (on) FRU failure indication - Receiver (#1, #2, #3 or #4) has a major alarm, and is out of serviceFlashing (on) Receiver (#1, #2, #3 or #4) has a minor alarm, and may be operating at reduced performanceOff Receiver (#1, #2, #3 or #4) is operating normally (no alarms)TX1 Green BR Solid (on) Station Transmit Carrier #1 is keyedFlashing (on) Station Transmit Carrier #1 is not keyedOff Station is out of service, or power is removedTX2 Green BR Solid (on) Station Transmit Carrier #2 is keyedFlashing (on) Station Transmit Carrier #2 is not keyedOff Station is out of service, or power is removedTX3 Green BR Solid (on) Station Transmit Carrier #3 is keyedFlashing (on) Station Transmit Carrier #3 is not keyedOff Station is out of service, or power is removedTX4 Green BR Solid (on) Station Transmit Carrier #4 is keyedFlashing (on) Station Transmit Carrier #4 is not keyedOff Station is out of service, or power is removedTable 2-9  BR Controller Controls Control DescriptionRESET Switch A push-button switch used to manually reset the BR.STATUS connectorA 9-pin connector used for connection of a service computer, providing a convenient means for testing and conÞguring.Table 2-8  BR Controller Indicators (Continued)LED Color ModuleMonitored Condition Indications
2-16 68P81095E02-D 12/6/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller Theory of OperationTable 2-11 brießy describes the BRC circuitry. Figure 2-9 is a functional block diagram of the BRC. Table 2-10  Pin-outs for the STATUS ConnectorPin-out Signal1 not used2 TXD3 RXD4 not used5 GND6 not used7 not used8 not used9 not usedTable 2-11  BR Controller CircuitryCircuit DescriptionHost Microprocessor Contains integrated circuits that comprise the central controller of the BRC and stationNon-Volatile Memory Consists of: ¥ FLASH containing the station operating software¥ EEPROM containing the station codeplug dataVolatile Memory Contains SDRAM to store station software used to execute commands.
68P81095E02-D   12/6/2000 2-17EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller Host MicroprocessorThe host microprocessor is the main controller for the BR. The processor operates at a 50-MHz clock speed. The processor controls Base Radio operation according to station software in memory. Station software resides in FLASH memory. For normal operation, the system transfers this software to non-volatile memory. An EEPROM contains the station codeplug.NOTEAt BR power-up, the EXBRC LED indicates a major alarm. This indication continues until BR software achieves a predetermined state of operation. Afterward, the software turns off the EXBRC LED.Serial Communication BusesThe microprocessor provides a general-purpose SMC serial management controller bus.The SMC serial communications bus is an asynchronous RS-232 interface with no hardware handshake capability. The BRC front panel includes a nine-pin, D-type connector. This connector provides a port where service personnel may connect a service computer. Service personnel can perform programming and maintenance tasks via Man-Machine Interface (MMI) commands. The interface between the Ethernet Interface Provides the BRC with a 10Base2 Ethernet communication port to network both control and compressed voice dataRS-232 Interface Provides the BRC with an RS-232 serial interfaceDigital Signal Processors Performs high-speed modulation/demodulation of compressed audio and signaling dataTISIC Contains integrated circuits that provide timing reference signals for the stationTX Reclock Contains integrated circuits that provide highly stable, reclocked transmit signals and peripheral transmit logicRX DSP SPI Contains integrated circuits that provide DSP SPI capability and peripheral transmit logicStation Reference Circuitry Generates the 16.8 MHz and 48 MHz reference signals used throughout the stationInput Ports  Contains 16 signal input ports that receive miscellaneous inputs from the BROutput Ports Contains 40 signal output ports, providing a path for sending miscellaneous control signals to circuits throughout the BRRemote Station Shutdown Provides software control to cycle power on the BRTable 2-11  BR Controller CircuitryCircuit Description
2-18 68P81095E02-D 12/6/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller SMC port and the front- panel STATUS connector is via EIA-232 Bus Receivers and Drivers.Host ProcessorThe microprocessor incorporates 4k bytes of instruction cache and 4k bytes of data cache that signiÞcantly enhance processor performance.The microprocessor has a 32-line address bus. The processor uses this bus to access non-volatile memory and SDRAM memory. Via memory mapping, the processor also uses this bus to control other BRC circuitry. The microprocessor uses its Chip Select capability to decode addresses and assert an output signal. The eight chip-select signals select non-volatile memory, SDRAM memory, input ports, output ports, and DSPs.The Host SPI serves as a general-purpose, serial communications bus. This bus... ❐Provides communications between the Host Microprocessor and other Base Radio modules.❐Provides condition signals necessary to access SDRAM, FLASH, and DSP.❐Provides refresh capability to SDRAM memory.❐Accepts interrupt signals from BRC circuits (such as DSPs). ❐Organizes the interrupts, based on hardware-deÞned priority ranking.The Host supports several internal interrupts from its Communications Processor Module. These interrupts allow efÞcient use of peripheral interfaces.The Host supports 10 Mbps Ethernet/IEEE 802.3. A 32-line data bus transfers data to and from BRC memory and other BRC circuitry. Buffers on this data bus allow transfers to and from non-volatile and SDRAM memory.Non-Volatile MemoryBase Radio software resides in 2M x 32 bytes of FLASH memory. The Host Microprocessor addresses the FLASH memory with 20 of the host address busÕ 32 lines. The host accesses FLASH data over the 32-line host data bus. A host-operated chip-select line provides control signals for these transactions. The FLASH contains the operating system and application code. The system stores application code in FLASH for fast recovery from reset conditions. Application code transfers from network or site controllers may occur in a background mode. Background mode transfers allow the station to remain operational during new code upgrades.The data that determines the station personality resides in a 32K x eight byte codeplug EEPROM. The microprocessor addresses the EEPROM with 15 of the host address busÕ 32 lines. The host accesses EEPROM data with eight of the data busÕ 32 lines. A host-operated chip-select line provides control signals for these transactions.
68P81095E02-D   12/6/2000 2-19EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller During the manufacturing process, the factory programs the codeplugÕs default data. The BRC must download Þeld programming data from network and site controllers. This data includes operating frequencies and output power level. The station permits adjustment of many station parameters, but the station does not store these adjustments. Refer to the Software Commands chapter for additional information.Volatile MemoryEach BRC contains 8MB x 32 bytes of SDRAM. The BRC downloads station software code into SDRAM for station use. SDRAM also provides short-term storage for data generated and required during normal operation. SDRAM is volatile memory. A loss of power or system reset destroys SDRAM data. The system performs read and write operations over the Host Address and Data buses. These operations involve column and row select lines under control of the Host processorÕs DRAM controller. The Host Glue ASICÕs address bus and column row signals sequentially refresh SDRAM memory locations.Ethernet InterfaceThe Host processorÕs Communications Processor Module (CPM) provides the Local Area Network (LAN) Controller for the Ethernet Interface. The LAN function implements the CSMA/CD access method, which supports the IEEE 802.3 10Base2 standard. The LAN coprocessor supports all IEEE 802.3 Medium Access Control, including the following: ❐framing ❐preamble generation ❐stripping❐source address generation❐destination address checkingThe PCM LAN receives commands from the CPU. The Ethernet Serial Interface works directly with the CPM LAN to perform the following major functions:❐10 MHz transmit clock generation (obtained by dividing the 20 MHz signal provided by on-board crystal)❐Manchester encoding/decoding of frames❐electrical interface to the Ethernet transceiverAn isolation transformer provides high-voltage protection. The transformer also isolates the Ethernet Serial Interface (ESI) and the transceiver. The pulse transformer has the following characteristics:❐Minimum inductance of 75 µH❐2000 V isolation between primary and secondary windings❐1:1 Pulse Transformer
2-20 68P81095E02-D 12/6/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller The Coaxial Transceiver Interface (CTI) is a coaxial cable line driver and receiver for the Ethernet. CTI provides a 10Base2 connection via a coaxial connector on the board. This device minimizes the number of external components necessary for Ethernet operations. A DC/DC converter provides a constant voltage of -9 Vdc for the CTI from a 3.3 Vdc source. The CTI performs the following functions:❐Receives and transmits data to the Ethernet coaxial connection❐Reports any collision that it detects on the coaxial connection❐Disables the transmitter when packets are longer than the legal length (Jabber Timer)Digital Signal ProcessorsThe BRC includes two Receive Digital Signal Processors (RXDSPs) and a Transmit Digital Signal Processor (TXDSP). These DSPs and related circuitry process compressed station transmit and receive audio or data. The related circuitry includes the TDMA Infrastructure Support IC (TISIC) and the TISIC Interface Circuitry. The DSPs only accept input and output signals in digitized form.The inputs are digitized receiver signals. The outputs are digitized voice audio and data (modulation signals). These signals pass from the DSP to the Exciter portion of the EXBRC. DSPs communicate with the Microprocessor via an eight-bit, host data bus on the host processor side. For all DSPs, interrupts drive communication with the host.The RXDSPs operate from an external 16.8 MHz clock, provided by the local station reference. The RXDSP internal operating clock signal is 150MHz, produced by an internal Phase-Locked Loop (PLL). The RXDSPs accept digitized signals from the receivers through Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface (ESSI) ports. Each of two ESSI ports on a RXDSP supports a single carrier (single receiver) digital data input. The DSP circuitry includes two RXDSPs. These allow processing of up to four carriers (four receivers).The RXDSP accesses its DSP program and signal-processing algorithms in 128k words of internal memory. The RXDSPs communicate with the host bus over an 8-bit interface. Each RXDSP provides serial communications to its respective receiver module for receiver control via a Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI). The SPI is a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit, connected to the RXDSP data bus. Each RXDSP communicates to two receive modules through this interface.Additionally, a serial control path connects the two RXDSPs and the TXDSP. The Synchronous Communications Interface (SCI) port facilitates this serial control path. For initialization and control purposes, one RXDSP connects to the TISIC device.
68P81095E02-D   12/6/2000 2-21EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller The TXDSP operates at an external clock speed of 16.8 MHz, provided by the EXBRC local station reference. The TXDSP internal operating clock is 150MHz, produced by an internal Phase Lock Loop (PLL). The TXDSP sends up to four carriers of digitized signal to the EX11 exciter. The exciter converts the digital signal to analog. Also at the exciter, a highly stable clock reclocks the digital data. Reclocking enhances transmit signal integrity. Two framed and synchronized data streams result. One data stream is I-data, and the other is the Q-data stream.The TXDSP contains its own, internal address and data memory. The TXDSP can store 128k words of DSP program and data memory. An eight-bit interface handles TXDSP-to-host bus communications.
2-22 68P81095E02-D 12/6/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller TISICThe TISIC controls internal DSP operations. This circuit provides the following functions:❐For initialization and control, interfaces with one RXDSP via the DSP address and data buses.❐Accepts a 16.8 MHz signal from Station Reference Circuitry.❐Accepts a 5 MHz signal, modulated with one pulse per second (1 PPS) from the site reference. ❐Demodulates the 1 PPS ❐Outputs a 1 PPS signal and a windowed version of this signal for network timing alignment.❐Outputs a 2.4 MHz reference signal used by the Exciter.l❐Generates 15 ms and 7.5 ms ticks. (These ticks synchronize to the 1 PPS time mark. The system decodes the time mark from the site reference. Then the system routes the reference to the TXDSP and RXDSPs.)Station Reference CircuitryThe Station Reference Circuitry is a phase-locked loop (PLL). This PLL consists of a high-stability, Voltage-Controlled, Crystal Oscillator (VCXO) and a PLL IC. GPS output from the iSC connects to the 5 MHz/1 PPS BNC connector on the BR backplane. Wiring at this connector routes signals to EXBRC station reference circuitry. The PLL compares the 5 MHz reference frequency to the 16.8 MHz VCXO output. Then the PLL generates a DC correction voltage. The PLL applies this correction voltage to the VCO through an analog gate. The analog gate closes when three conditions coexist: (1) The 5 MHz tests stable. (2) The PLL IC is programmed. (3) Two PLL oscillator and reference signal output alignments occur. A loss of the 5 MHz / 1 PPS signal causes the control voltage enable switch to open. This complex PLL control allows the BR to maintain call-handover capability during short disconnects (approximately one minute) of the 5 MHz/1 PPS signal. (For example, during 5 MHz/1 PPS cable maintenance work.) When the gate enables, the control voltage from the PLL can adjust the high-stability VCXO frequency. The adjustment can achieve a stability nearly equivalent to that of the external, 5 MHz frequency reference.The correction voltage from the PLL continuously adjusts the VXCO frequency. The VXCO outputs a 16.8 MHz clock signal. The circuit applies this clock signal to the receiver, 48 MHz reference and TISIC. The receivers use the 16.8MHz as the clock input and synthesizer reference.The 48 MHz EXBRC synthesizer uses the 16.8 MHz as its synthesizer reference. The 48 MHz synthesizer output is the clock input for the TXDSP I and Q data reclock circuitry.The TISIC divides the 16.8 MHz signal by seven, and outputs a 2.4 MHz signal. This output signal then becomes the 2.4 MHz reference for the Exciter.
68P81095E02-D   12/6/2000 2-23EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller Input PortsOne general-purpose input register provides for BRC and station circuit input signals. The register has 16 input ports. The Host Data Bus conveys input register data to the Host Microprocessor. Typical inputs include 16.8 and 48 MHz Station Reference Circuitry status outputs and reset status outputs.Output PortsTwo general-purpose output registers distribute control signals from the Host Microprocessor to the BRC and station circuitry. Each register has 40 output ports. Control signal distribution occurs over the backplane. The Host Data Bus drives the output portsÕ latched outputs. Typical control signals include front-panel LED signals and SPI peripheral enable and address lines.Remote Station ShutdownThe BRC contains power supply shutdown circuitry. This circuitry can send a shutdown pulse to the Base Radio Power Supply. BRC software generates the shutdown control pulse. After receiving a shutdown pulse, the power supply turns off BR power. Shut down power sources include 3.3, 28.6 and 14.2 Vdc sources throughout the BR. Due to charges retained by BR storage elements, power supply voltages may not reach zero. The shutdown only assures that the host processor enters a power-on-reset state. A remote site uses the shutdown function to perform a hard reset of all BR modules.
2-24 68P81095E02-D 11/9/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2This Page IntentionallyLeft Blank
 68P81095E02-D   4/16/99 2-25 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios   2ETHERNETSERIALINTERFACEISOLATIONTRANSFORMER TRANSCEIVERHOST BUFFERED DATA BUSHOST ADDRESS BUSHOST BUFFERED DATA BUSHOST ADDRESS BUSHOST DATA BUSDRAM ADDRESSMULTIPLEXERCOLUMN/ROWSELECTDRAMCOLUMNADDRESSDRAMROWADDRESS16.5 MHZ CLKSERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUSSERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUSROWSELECT(RAS*)COLSELECT(CAS*)DRAMADDRESSHOSTGLUEASIC33 MHZTIMINGCIRCUITRYBUFFERSEPROM512K X 88K X 8EEPROMCODEPLUG32K X 8SRAM32K X 8SRAMA1-A11A10-A22A1-A19A1-A19A1-A15HOSTADDRESSA1-A1848STATUS PORT(9 PIN D CONNECTORON BRC FRONT PANEL)RS-232 PORT(9 PIN D CONNECTORON BACKPLANE)EIA-232BUSRECEIVERS/DRIVERS48EPROM512K X 8BUFFERSSPI BUSSPI BUSTO/FROMSTATION MODULES3HOST ADDRESS BUSNON-VOLATILE MEMORYHOSTMICRO-PROCESSORHOST MICROPROCESSOR / HOST ASICHOSTADDRESS1-23EIA-232BUSRECEIVERS/DRIVERSDRAM MEMORYBUFFERSVARIOUS INPUTSFROM BRC &STATION CIRCUITRYINPUT/OUTPUT PORTS CIRCUITRYI/O PORT P0 INHOST DATA BUSI/O PORT P0 OUTI/O PORT P1 OUTI/O PORT P2 OUTVARIOUSCONTROLLINES TO BRC &STATIONCIRCUITRYFROM HOSTMICROPROCESSORI/O PORT P1 INBUFFERSBUFFERS1616161616REMOTE STATIONSHUTDOWN CIRCUITRYSHUTDOWN(TO POWERSUPPLY)28VI/O PORTP2 OUTFRONT PANEL LEDSLED CONTROLLINES(P/O I/O PORTP0 OUT)BASERADIO POWERSUPPLY EXCITER PA CTL R1 R2 R38ETHERNET INTERFACECDRXTXCLSNRCVTRMTFROMHOSTMICROPROCESSORADDR BUSDATA BUSCOPROCESSORADDR BUS COPROCESSORDATA BUS10BASE2COAXETHERNETSERIALINTERFACEHOSTINTERFACEETHERNETCOPROCESSOR(82596DX)AEBTS286010397SND0-D15LANIICSHUTDOWNCIRCUITRYA1-A15A1-A15D0-D15D0-D7D0-D15D0-D15VCC RESET SWITCH(FRONT PANEL)DRAM1M X 16A2-A23Single Channel Base Radio ControllerFigure:2-6800/900 MHz Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram(Sheet 1 of 2)
 26 68P81095E02-D   4/16/99 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2  TISIC INTERFACE CIRCUITRYTISIC16.8 MHZIN2.1 MHZOUTRX1 DATARX1 SERIALRESETADDRESSDATA16.8 MHZ TO ASIC2.1 MHZ FROM DSP ASICRX2 DATARX2 SERIALRX3 DATARX3 SERIALSTATION REFERENCE CIRCUITRY16.8 MHZ TO ASICCONTROL VOLTAGEENABLE SWITCHCONTROL VOLTAGE5 MHZ REFSPI BUS5 MHz/1PPSBNC CONNECTORON BACKPLANE2.1 MHZ REF TO EXCITERMODULE VIA BACKPLANE2.1 MHZ REF TO RECEIVERMODULE #1, 2, 3 VIA BACKPLANE16.8 MHZ33DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR (DSP) / DSP ASICDSP DATA BUSRECEIVE SYNCHRONOUSSERIAL INTERFACE BUS(RXSSI)SYNCHRONOUS SERIALINTERFACE (SSI)FROMHOSTMICRO-PROCESSORHOSTDATABUSHOSTADDRESSBUS3DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR(DSP) / DSP ASICTRANSMITDIGITALSIGNALPROCESSOR(TXDSP)ADDRESSDATAHOSTPORTSERIALCOMMUNICATIONSINTERFACE (SCI)SYNCHRONOUSSERIAL INTERFACE (SSI)TRANSMIT SYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (TXSSI)FROMHOSTMICRO-PROCESSOR HOSTADDRESSBUSHOSTDATABUSCLOCKOSCILLATOR333RECEIVEDIGITALSIGNALPROCESSOR(RXDSP)HOSTPORTADDRESSDATA32K X 8RAM32K X 8RAM32K X 8RAM32K X 8RAM32K X 8RAM32K X 8RAM32K X 8RAM32K X 8RAM32K X 8RAMSERIAL BUS SERIAL BUSDIFFERENTIAL DATAFROM RECEIVER MODULE #1VIA BACKPLANERX1 DATASERIAL BUSTO/FROMRECEIVERMODULE #166SERIAL BUS SERIAL BUSDIFFERENTIAL DATAFROM RECEIVER MODULE #2VIA BACKPLANERX2 DATASERIAL BUSTO/FROMRECEIVERMODULE #266SERIAL BUS SERIAL BUSDIFFERENTIAL DATAFROM RECEIVER MODULE #3VIA BACKPLANERX3 DATASERIAL BUSTO/FROMRECEIVERMODULE #366DIFFERENTIAL DATATO EXCITER MODULEVIA BACKPLANE4.8 MHz TRANLIN CLOCKTO EXCITER MODULEVIA BACKPLANEA3SERIALCOMMUNICATIONSINTERFACE (SCI)3TXLINDATA4.8 MHz TXLINCLOCKPHASELOCKEDLOOPICFINOSCINHIGHSTABILITYVCXOBUFFER/SPLITTERBUFFERSDIFFERENTIAL-TO-TTLCONVERTER/BUFFERBUFFERSDIFFERENTIAL-TO-TTLCONVERTER/BUFFERBUFFERSDIFFERENTIAL-TO-TTLCONVERTER/BUFFERTTL-TO-DIFFERENTIALCONVERTER/BUFFERTTL-TO-DIFFERENTIALCONVERTER/BUFFEREBTS292122094JNMAGC4TO RECEIVERS (1-3)1PPS 5MHz/1PPS COMBINED SIGNALENABLEINPUTBase Radio ControllerFigure:2-7800/900 MHz Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram(Sheet 2 of 2)
 68P81095E02-D   4/16/99 2-27 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios  Base Radio ControllerFunctional Block DiagramModel TLN3425(Includes Front Panel Board)HOSTADDRESSA1-A23SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS (SCC3)SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS (SCC2)HOST BUFFERED DATA BUSHOST ADDRESS BUSHOST BUFFERED DATA BUSHOST ADDRESS BUSHOST DATA BUSDRAM ADDRESSMULTIPLEXERCOLUMN/ROWSELECTDRAMCOLUMNADDRESSDRAMROWADDRESSROWSELECT(RAS*)COLSELECT(CAS*)COLSELECT(CAS*)ROWSELECT(RAS*)DRAMADDRESSDRAMADDRESSHOSTASIC33 MHZTIMINGCIRCUITRYBUFFERSEPROM256K X 88K X 8EEPROMCODEPLUG8K X 8SRAM8K X 8SRAMA1-A11A10-A22A1-A18A1-A18A1-A1548EIA-232BUSRECEIVERS/DRIVERS69EPROM256K X 8SPI BUSSPI BUSTO/FROMSTATION MODULES3HOST ADDRESS BUSNON-VOLATILE MEMORYHOSTMICRO-PROCESSORHOST MICROPROCESSOR / HOST ASICDRAM1M X 8DRAM1M X 8HOSTADDRESS1-23EIA-232BUSRECEIVERS/DRIVERSDYNAMIC RAMVARIOUS INPUTSFROM BRC &STATION CIRCUITRYINPUT/OUTPUT PORTS CIRCUITRYI/O PORT P0 INHOST DATA BUS I/O PORT P0 OUTI/O PORT P1 OUTI/O PORT P2 OUTI/O PORT P3 OUTVARIOUSCONTROLLINES TO BRC &STATIONCIRCUITRYFROM HOSTMICROPROCESSORI/O PORT P1 INLATCHESBUFFERS161616161616REMOTE STATIONSHUTDOWN CIRCUITRYSHUTDOWN(TO POWERSUPPLY)28VI/O PORTP3 OUTFRONT PANEL LEDS (Part of TRN7769)LED CONTROLLINES(P/O I/O PORTP0 OUT)BASERADIO POWERSUPPLY EXCITER PA BRC RX1 RX2 RX38ETHERNET INTERFACECDRXTXCLSNRCVTRMTFROMHOSTMICROPROCESSORADDR BUSDATA BUSCOPROCESSORADDR BUS COPROCESSORDATA BUS10BASE2COAXETHERNETSERIALINTERFACE82596DXETHERNETCOPROCESSORETHERNETSERIALINTERFACE TRANSCEIVERAHOSTINTERFACEISOLATIONTRANSFORMERSHUTDOWNCIRCUITRYBUFFERSBUFFERS16.5 MHZ CLKDC/DCCONVERTER5 VDC-9 VDC231620 MHZTIMINGCIRCUIT20 MHzXMT CLK(10 MHZ)A1-A13A1-A13STATUS(9 PIN D CONNECTORON BRC FRONT PANEL)RS232(9 PIN D CONNECTORON BACKPLANE)STATIC RAMFigure:2-81500 MHz Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
 28 68P81095E02-D   4/16/99 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2  Base Radio ControllerFunctional Block DiagramModel TLN3425(Includes Front Panel Board)HOST ADDRESSBUS FROM HOSTMICROPROCESSORLATCHERRORCORRECTIONDIGITALSIGNALPROCESSORDSP DATA BUS32K X 8RAM32K X 8RAM32K X 8RAMTRANSMIT SYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (TXSSI)332K X 8RAM32K X 8RAM 32K X 8RAM32K X 8RAM 32K X 8RAM32K X 8RAMSCI3SSI3DSP ASIC INTERFACE CIRCUITRYDSPGLUEASIC16.8 MHZIN2.1 MHZOUTRX1 DATARX1 SERIAL16.8 MHZ TO ASIC2.1 MHZ FROM DSP ASICRX2 DATARX2 SERIALRX3 DATARX3 SERIALSTATION REFERENCE CIRCUITRYPHASELOCKEDLOOP IC16.8 MHZ TO ASICCONTROL VOLTAGEENABLE SWITCHCONTROL VOLTAGEFREQUENCY NET ENABLE(I/O PORT P1 OUT)5 MHZ FROMEXTERNALREFERENCE(FOR NETTINGPENDULUM)5 MHZ REFSPI BUSBNC CONNECTORON BACKPLANE2.1 MHZ REF TO EXCITERMODULE VIA BACKPLANE2.1 MHZ REF TO RECEIVERMODULE #1, 2, 3 VIA BACKPLANESPI BUS 16.8 MHZFINOSCINHIGHSTABILITYVCO333DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR (DSP) / DSP ASICTRANSMITDIGITALSIGNALPROCESSORADDRESSDATASERIAL BUS SERIAL BUSDIFFERENTIAL DATAFROM RECEIVER MODULE #1VIA BACKPLANERX1 DATASERIAL BUSTO/FROMRECEIVERMODULE #166BUFFERSDIFFERENTIAL-TO-TTLCONVERTER/BUFFERSERIAL BUS SERIAL BUSDIFFERENTIAL DATAFROM RECEIVER MODULE #2VIA BACKPLANERX2 DATASERIAL BUSTO/FROMRECEIVERMODULE #266BUFFERSDIFFERENTIAL-TO-TTLCONVERTER/BUFFERSERIAL BUS SERIAL BUSDIFFERENTIAL DATAFROM RECEIVER MODULE #3VIA BACKPLANERX3 DATASERIAL BUSTO/FROMRECEIVERMODULE #366BUFFERSDIFFERENTIAL-TO-TTLCONVERTER/BUFFERDIFFERENTIAL DATATO EXCITER MODULEVIA BACKPLANETTL-TO-DIFFERENTIALCONVERTER/BUFFERDIFFERENTIAL DATATO EXCITER MODULEVIA BACKPLANETTL-TO-DIFFERENTIALCONVERTER/BUFFERABUFFER/SPLITTER1 PPSSTRIPPERPAL1 PPS1 PPSIN40 MHZTIMINGCIRCUITRYADDRESSDATADIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR (DSP) / DSP ASICRECEIVEDIGITALSIGNALPROCESSORADDRESSDATA40 MHZTIMINGCIRCUITRYRECEIVE SYNCHRONOUSSERIAL INTERFACE BUS(RXSSI)3DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR (DSP) / DSP ASIC32K X 8RAM32K X 8RAMADDRESSDATAHOSTPORTLATCH ADDRESSBUSHOST DATA BUSFROM HOSTMICROPROCESSORHOST DATA BUSFROM HOSTMICROPROCESSORLATCH ADDRESSBUSSCISSI33HOSTPORTLATCH ADDRESS BUS10 MHZ TIMINGCIRCUITRYHOST DATA BUSFROM HOSTMICROPROCESSORSSI3SSI3AGCTO RECEIVERVIA BACKPLANEAGCTXLINDATATXLINCLOCKFigure:2-91500 MHz Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)
 68P81095E02-D   12/4/2000 2--29 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Base Radio Controller   2SPIBUSPHASEDETECTION/FILTERINGHIGHSTABILITYVCXO48 MHZ16.8MHZQUAD Channel BaseRadio ControllerFunctional Block DiagramFigure:2-10QUAD CHANNEL Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram(Sheet 1 of 2)POWERSUPPLY EXCITER/CONTROL PA REF RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4P0 OUTLEDCONTROLLINESHOSTLATCH12FRONT PANEL LEDS REMOTE STATION3.3VP0_OUTSHUTDOWNCIRCUITRYSHUTDOWN(TO POWERSUPPLY)SHUTDOWN CIRCUITRYSYNTHESIZERIC / CIRCUITRY5MHZ_1PPSBASE RADIOINPUTHIGHSTABILITYVCXOPHASEDETECTION/FILTERING/CONTROLSTEARINGLINEDISCONNECT/CONNECTCONTROLGATINGSPIBUS16.8 MHZSYNTHESIZERIC / CIRCUITRYSTEARINGLINESTATION REFERENCE CIRCUITRYTRANSMIT REFERENCE CIRCUITRY5MHZ1PPS
 2--30 68P81095E02-D   12/4/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Base Radio Controller  QUAD Channel Base Radio ControllerFunctional Block DiagramFigure:2-11QUAD CHANNEL Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram(Sheet 2 of 2)HOSTMICRO-ETHERNETSERIALINTERFACETRANS-CDRCV RXTRMT TXCLSN10BASE2COAXETHERNETSERIALINTERFACECEIVERISOLATIONTRANSFORMERPROCESSORSCC18SDRAM4M x 16SDRAM4M x 16SDRAM4M x 16SDRAM4M x 16GPLA0, A[8,9,17,18,20:29],RAS,CAS,WECS2CS3D[0:31]D[0:15]D[16:31]D[0:15]D[16:31]BUFFERBUFFERBUFFERBUFFERBUFFERBUFFERD[0:31]D[0:7]A[10:31]MA[21:0]DSP_D[31:24]A[0:7]DSP_A[31:24]MD[31:0]EIA-232BUSRECEIVERS/DRIVERS2STATUS PORT(9 PIN D CONNECTORON BRC FRONT PANEL)2BUFFER33SPI BUS TO/FROM STATION MODULESFLASH1M x 16FLASH1M x 16FLASH1M x 16FLASH1M x 16CS0CS1MD[0:15]MD[16:31]MD[0:15]MD[16:31]1616161616 161616MA[2:21]MA[2:21]EEPROM32k x 8MD[24:31]MA[0:14]CS4P1_OUTLATCHP0_OUTLATCHMD[0:32]MD[24:31]P0_INBUFFERMD[16,17,20-24,28-31]STATUS BUSFROMSTATION MODULESP0_IN8CONTROL BUSTOSTATION MODULESP0_OUT/P1_OUT328TRANSMITDIGITALSIGNALPROCESSOR(TX DSP)SINGLE ENDTO DIFFERENTIALTRANSMITCLOCK ANDFRAME SYNCHCIRCUITRYI/Q DATASERIAL DATATO EXCITERDIFFERENTIALTO SINGLE ENDRX1 SERIAL DATARECEIVEDIGITALSIGNALPROCESSOR(RX DSP 1)RECEIVEDIGITALSIGNALPROCESSOR(RX DSP 2)TISICA[0:5]D[0, 8:23]PARALLELTO SERIALCIRCUITRYD[16:23]D[16:23]D[0, 23]SPI BUS TORECEIVER 1 & 2SPI BUS TORECEIVER 3 & 42.4 MHz1 PPS TIMING, CONTROL/ SLOT TIMING/RESETNETWORKEDSCI16.8MHZ48 MHZSPIBUSSPIBUSEXCITERSPICONTROLDSP SPISPI BUSTO EXCITERDIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING CIRCUITRYDIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING CIRCUITRYDIFFERENTIALTO SINGLE ENDDIFFERENTIALTO SINGLE ENDDIFFERENTIALTO SINGLE END50 MHZCLOCKFRONT PANELRESETDRAM MEMORYETHERNET INTERFACENON-VOLATILE MEMORY EXPANDED STATUS INPUTAND OUTPUT CONTROL CIRCUITRYEXTENDED HOSTBUS BUFFERS40TO EXCITER5MHZ1PPSRX2 SERIAL DATARX3 SERIAL DATARX4 SERIAL DATAHOST ADDRESS BUSHOST DATA BUSHOST BUFFERED DATA BUSHOST BUFFERED ADDRESS BUSHOST-DSP BUFFERED DATA BUSHOST-DSP BUFFERED ADDRESS BUSSERIAL MANAGEMENT CONTROLLER (SMC2)SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 3-1 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios 3   Exciter Overview This section provides technical information for the Exciter (EX). Table 3-1 describes covered topics.  FRU Number to Kit Number Cross Reference Exciter Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) are available for the iDEN EBTS. The FRU contains the Exciter kit and required packaging. Table 3-2 provides a cross reference between Exciter FRU numbers and kit numbers.  Table 3-1   Chapter Topics Chapter Page Description 800 MHz Exciter Ð TLN3337; 900 MHz Exciter Ð CLN1357; 1500 MHz Exciter Ð TLN34283-2 Describes the functions and characteristics of the Exciter module for the single channel Base Radio (BR).QUAD Channel 800 MHz Exciter 3-7 Describes the functions and characteristics of the Exciter module for the QUAD channel Base Radio (BR).Exciter 800 MHz Functional 3-11 Functional Block Diagram for the Single Channel Base Radio Exciter800 MHz QUAD ChannelFunctional Block Diagram 3-13 Functional Block Diagram for the QUAD Channel Base Radio Exciter Table 3-2   FRU Number to Kit Number Cross Referece Description FRU Number Kit Number Single Channel Exciter (800 MHz) TLN3337 CLF1490Single Channel Exciter (900 MHz) CLN1357 CLF1500Single Channel Exciter (1500 MHz) TLN3428 CTX1120QUAD Channel Exciter/Base Radio Controller (800 MHz)CLN1497 CLF1560
 3-2 68P81095E02-D 11/9/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800 MHz Exciter – TLN3337; 900 MHz Exciter – CLN1357; 1500 MHz Exciter – TLN3428 800 MHz Exciter – TLN3337;900 MHz Exciter – CLN1357;1500 MHz Exciter – TLN3428 Exciter Overview The Exciter, together with the Power AmpliÞer (PA), provides the transmitter functions for the Base Radio.  The Exciter module consists of a printed circuit board, a slide-in housing, and associated hardware. The Exciter connects to the Base Radio backplane through a 96-pin DIN connector and two blindmate RF connectors.  Two   Torx screws on the front of the Exciter hold it in the chassis. The Exciter has no controls or indicators. The manualÕs Base Radio section supplies transmitter circuitry speciÞcations, including Exciter and PA speciÞcations.Figures 3-1 and 3-2 show the Exciter with the cover removed.Figure:3-1800/900 MHz Exciter (with cover removed)
 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 3-3 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios 800 MHz Exciter – TLN3337; 900 MHz Exciter – CLN1357; 1500 MHz Exciter – TLN3428 Theory of Operation Table 3-3 lists and describes basic Exciter circuitry.  Figures 3-4 and 3-5 show the functional block diagram of the Single Carrier Exciter. Figures 3-6 show the functional block diagram of the QUAD Carrier Exciter. Address Decoder Circuitry The address decoder circuitry enables the BRC to use the address bus to control Exciter circuitry.  The BRC can select a speciÞc device on the Exciter via the SPI bus for control or data communication purposes. If board select circuitry decodes address lines A2 through A5 as the Exciter address, the BRC enables the chip select circuitry.  The chip select circuitry then decodes address lines A0 and A1 to generate the chip select signals for the EEPROM, A/D converter, Tranlin IC, and PLL IC.  Once selected, the BRC uses the SPI bus to send and receive data to and from the device. Memory Circuitry The memory circuitry consists of an EEPROM located on the Exciter.  The BRC performs all memory read and write operations via the SPI bus.  Information 1.5GHZ-B859Figure:3-21500 MHz Exciter, version TLN3428 (with top removed)
 3-4 68P81095E02-D 11/9/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800 MHz Exciter – TLN3337; 900 MHz Exciter – CLN1357; 1500 MHz Exciter – TLN3428 stored in this memory device includes the kit number, revision number, module speciÞc scaling and correction factors, and free form information (scratch pad). A/D Converter Circuitry Analog signals from various areas throughout the Exciter board are fed to the A/D converter. Upon the BRCÕs request, these analog signals are converted to a digital signal and are output to the BRC via the SPI lines.  The BRC periodically monitors and controls all signals. Table 3-3   Exciter Circuitry  Circuit Description Tranlin IC Performs the following functions:¥ up-converts the baseband data to the Þrst IF¥ down-converts the IF feedback signal to baseband¥ uses a baseband Cartesian feedback loop system, which is necessary to obtain linearity from the transmitter and avoid splattering power into adjacent channels¥ performs training functions for proper linearization of the transmitterExciter IC Interfaces with Tranlin IC to perform:¥ up-conversion from the Þrst IF to the transmit operating frequency¥ down-conversion to the IF of PA output feedback signal for input to the Tranlin ICAddress Decode, Memory, & A/D ConverterServes as the main interface between the synthesizer, Tranlin IC, A/D, and EEPROM on the Exciter and the BRC via the SPI busFrequency Synthesizer CircuitryConsists of a phase-locked loop and VCO. Provides a LO signal to the Exciter IC for the second up-conversion and for the Þrst down-conversion of the feedback signal from the PA970 MHz VCO (800 MHz BR)1025 MHz VCO (900 MHz BR)760 MHz VCO (1500 MHz BR)Provides a LO signal to the Exciter IC for the second up-conversion to the transmit frequency237 MHz VCO (800 MHz BR)236 MHz VCO (1500 MHz BR)Provides a LO signal to Tranlin IC for the Þrst up-conversion and for the second down-conversion of the feedback signal. The synthesizer and divide by 2 circuitry within the Tranlin IC set the Þrst IF to 118.5 MHz180.6 MHz VCO (900 MHz BR) Provides a LO signal to Tranlin IC for the Þrst up-conversion and for the second down-conversion of the feedback signal. The synthesizer and divide by 2 circuitry within the Tranlin IC set the Þrst IF to 90.3 MHzRegulator Circuitry Provides a regulated voltage to various ICs and RF devices located on the ExciterLinear RF ampliÞer Stages AmpliÞes the RF signal from the Exciter IC to an appropriate level for input to the PAAutomatic Gain Control (AGC) provides automatic gain control of the transmitter (Exciter and Power AmpliÞer modules) to maintain a level forward gain of the RF ampliÞer stages.
 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 3-5 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios 800 MHz Exciter – TLN3337; 900 MHz Exciter – CLN1357; 1500 MHz Exciter – TLN3428 The BRC monitors the regulated voltages, the external wattmeter (optional), the PLL circuit, and other internal signals.  Tranlin IC Circuitry The Tranlin IC is a main interface between the Exciter and BRC. The Digital Signal Processors (DSP) of the BRC send Digitized signals (baseband data) to the Exciter via the DSP data bus. The DSP clock signal from the Receiver clocks these data signals.The differential data clock signal also serves as a 4.8 MHz reference signal to the internal synthesizer circuit of the Tranlin IC.  The Tranlin compares the reference signal with the output of the 237 MHz or 180.6 MHz (900 MHz BR) or 236 MHz (1500 MHz BR) Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO).  If the VCO output is out of phase or differs in frequency, correction pulses arrive at the Oscillator and adjust the VCO output. The Tranlin IC up-converts the baseband data received from the BRC to the Þrst IF of 118.5 MHz (90.3 MHz for 900 MHz BR).  It also down-converts an IF feedback signal from the Exciter IC to baseband data for summing.The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) bus is used to communicate with the Tranlin IC. The SPI bus serves as a general purpose bi-directional serial link between the BRC and other modules of the Base Radio, including the Exciter.  The SPI bus is used to send control and operational data signals to and from the various circuits of the Exciter. Exciter IC Circuitry The Exciter IC interfaces directly with the Tranlin IC to perform up-conversion from the Þrst IF to the programmed transmit operating frequency.  The Þrst IF signal is passed through a band-pass Þlter before it reaches the Exciter IC.The Exciter IC also down-converts the RF feedback signal from the PA to its IF signal.  The IF signal is then input to the Tranlin IC for conversion to baseband data, which computes the Cartesian feedback. Synthesizer Circuitry The synthesizer circuitry consists of the Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) IC and associated circuitry.  The output of this circuit is combined with the 970 MHz VCO (1025 MHz for 900 MHz BR, 700 MHz for 1500 MHz BR) to supply a Local Oscillator (LO) signal to the Exciter IC for the second up-conversion of the programmed transmit frequency.  This signal is also used for the Þrst down-conversion of the feedback signal from the PA.An internal phase detector generates a logic pulse in proportion to the difference in phase or frequency between the reference frequency and loop pulse signal. If the reference frequency is faster than the VCO feedback frequency, the PLL IC outputs an up signal.  If the reference frequency is slower than the VCO feedback frequency, the PLL IC outputs a down signal.  These pulses are used as correction signals and are fed to a charge pump circuit.
 3-6 68P81095E02-D 11/9/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800 MHz Exciter – TLN3337; 900 MHz Exciter – CLN1357; 1500 MHz Exciter – TLN3428 The charge pump circuit consists of Þve transistors and its associated biasing components.  This circuit generates the correction signal and causes it to move up or down in response to the phase detector output pulses.  The correction signal passes through the low-pass loop Þlter to the 970 MHz Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO) circuit (1025 MHz VCO for 900 MHz BR).   970/1025 MHz Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO) The 970 MHz VCO (1025 MHz for 900 MHz BR, 700 MHz for 1500 MHz BR) generates the second injection frequency for the Exciter IC. The VCO requires a very low-noise DC supply voltage of +10 Vdc for proper operation.  A Super Filter, which contains an ultra low-pass Þlter, drives the oscillator.  The Super Filter obtains the required low-noise output voltage for the oscillator. The output of the oscillator is tapped and sent to the VCO Feedback Filter.  This feedback signal is supplied to the Synthesizer circuitry for the generation of correction pulses. The untapped output of the 970 (or 1025) MHz VCO is sent to the second LO injection circuitry. 236/237/180.6 MHz Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO) The 237 MHz VCO (180.6 MHz for 900 MHz BR, 236 MHz for 1500 MHz BR) provides a LO signal to Tranlin IC for the Þrst up-conversion and for the second down-conversion of the feedback signal.  The synthesizer and divide by 2 circuitry within the Tranlin IC set the Þrst IF to 118.5 MHz (90.3 MHz for 900 MHz BR). Regulator Circuity This circuit generates three regulated voltages of +5 Vdc, +10 Vdc, and +11.8 Vdc. All voltages are obtained from the +14.2 Vdc backplane voltage.  These voltages provide power to various ICs and RF devices of the Exciter. Linear RF Amplifier Stages This circuitry is used to amplify the RF signal from the Exciter IC to an appropriate level for input to the PA. Automatic Gain Control (AGC) (1500 MHz only) The Automatic Gain Control (AGC) circuit controls the output gain of the transmitter (Exciter and Power AmpliÞer modules) so that constant forward gain of the RF ampliÞer stages is maintained. This is accomplished through the comparison of feedback signals from the Power AmpliÞer and the Þrst ampliÞer stage of the Exciter.The output of the differential ampliÞers is used to adjust the Attenuator and Image Filter.
 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 3-7 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios QUAD Channel 800 MHz Exciter QUAD Channel 800 MHz Exciter  Exciter Overview The Exciter and the Power AmpliÞer (PA) provide the transmitter functions of the QUAD Channel Base Radio.  The Exciter module consists of a printed circuit board, a slide in housing, and associated hardware. The BRC shares the printed circuit board and housing.The Exciter connects to the Base Radio backplane through a 168-pin connector and two blindmate RF connectors. Controller and exciter circuitry also interconnect on the Exciter/Controller module. Two   Torx screws on the front of the Exciter secure it to the chassis. An LED identiÞes the ExciterÕs operational condition, as described in the manualÕs Controller section.  The Base Radio section of the manual provides speciÞcations for transmitter circuitry. This information includes data on the Exciter and PAs.Figures 3-3 shows the Exciter with the cover removed.Figure:3-3800 MHz QUAD Channel Exciter (with cover removed)M
 3-8 68P81095E02-D 11/9/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 QUAD Channel 800 MHz Exciter Theory of Operation Table 3-4 describes the basic circuitry of the Exciter. Figures 3-4 and 3-5 show the functional block diagram of the Single Carrier Exciter. Figures 3-6 show the QUAD Carrier ExciterÕs functional block diagram. Memory Circuitry The memory circuitry is an EEPROM on the Controller portion of the Exciter/Controller module.  The Controller performs memory read and write operations over the SPI bus.  The memory device stores the following data... ❐ kit number ❐ revision number ❐ module speciÞc scaling and correction factors ❐ serial number Table 3-4  Exciter Circuitry  Circuit Description LNODCT IC ¥ Up-converts baseband data to the transmit frequency¥ Down-converts the PA feedback signal to baseband¥ Uses a baseband Cartesian feedback loop system, necessary to obtain linearity from the transmitter and avoid splattering power into adjacent channels¥ Performs training functions for proper linearization of the transmitterMemory & A/D Converter Serves as the main interface between the synthesizer, Tranlin IC, A/D, and EEPROM on the Exciter, and the BRC via the SPI busFrequency Synthesizer Circuitry¥ Consists of a phase-locked loop and VCO¥ Provides a LO signal to the LNODCT IC for the second up-conversion and first down-conversion of the feedback signal from the PA970 MHz VCO (800 MHz BR) Provides a LO signal to the LNODCT IC, for up-conversion to the transmit frequency90.3 MHz VCO (800 MHz BR) Provides a LO signal to LNODCT IC, for the up-conversion and for the down-conversion of the feedback signal. ¥ The LNODCT IC mixes the 970 MHz VCO and 90.3 MHz VCO¥ The mixed output becomes the LO signal for Transmit signal up- and down-conversionRegulator Circuitry Provides a regulated voltage to various ICs and RF devices located on the ExciterLinear RF ampliÞer Stages AmpliÞes the RF signal from the Exciter IC to an appropriate level for input to the PAAutomatic Gain Control (AGC) ¥ Provides automatic gain control of the transmitter (Exciter and Power AmpliÞer modules)¥ Maintains a level forward gain of the RF ampliÞer stages
 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 3-9 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios QUAD Channel 800 MHz Exciter ❐ free form information (scratch pad) A/D Converter Circuitry Analog signals from various areas throughout the Exciter board enter the A/D converter (A/DC).  The A/DC converts these analog signals to digital form. Upon request of the BRC, A/DC output signals enter the BRC via SPI lines. The Controller periodically monitors all signals.Some of the monitored signals include ampliÞer bias and synthesizer signals.  LNODCT IC Circuitry The LNODCT IC is a main interface between the Exciter and BRC. The BRCÕs Digital Signal Processor (DSP) sends digitized signals (baseband data) to the Exciter over the DSP data bus.The differential data clock signal serves as a 4.8 MHz reference signal to the LNODCT ICÕs internal synthesizer.  The LNODCT compares the reference signal with the outputs of Voltage Controlled Oscillators (VCOs). The LNODCT might sense that a VCOÕs output is out of phase or off-frequency. If so, then the LNODCT sends correction pulses to the VCO. The pulses adjust VCO output, thereby matching phase and frequency with the reference. The LNODCT IC up-converts baseband data from the BRC to the transmit frequency. The LNODCT IC also down-converts the Transmit signal from the Power AmpliÞer to baseband data for summing.The BRC uses the Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) bus to communicate with the LNODCT IC. The SPI bus serves as a general purpose, bi-directional, serial link between the BRC and other Base Radio modules, including the Exciter.  The SPI carries control and operational data signals to and from Exciter circuits. Synthesizer Circuitry The synthesizer circuit consists of the Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) IC and associated circuitry.  This circuitÕs output combines with the 970 MHz VCO signal. The result is a Local Oscillator (LO) signal for the LNODCT IC. The LNODCT uses this LO signal to up-convert the programmed transmit frequency.  The LNODCT also uses the LO signal to down-convert the PA feedback signal.An internal phase detector generates a logic pulse. This pulse is proportional to the phase or frequency difference between the reference frequency and loop pulse signal. If the reference frequency is faster than the VCO feedback frequency, the PLL IC outputs an up signal. If the reference frequency is slower than the VCO feedback frequency, the PLL IC outputs a down signal. The synthesizer uses these pulses as correction signals and feed them to a charge pump circuit. The charge pump circuit consists of Þve transistors and associated biasing components.  This circuit generates the correction signal. The correction signal moves up or down in response to phase detector output pulses.  The correction
 3-10 68P81095E02-D 11/9/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 QUAD Channel 800 MHz Exciter signal passes through the low-pass loop Þlter. The signal then enters the 970 MHz Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO) circuit.   970 MHz Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO) The 970 MHz VCO generates the second injection frequency for the LNODCT IC. For proper operation, the VCO requires a very low-noise, DC supply voltage.  An ultra low-pass Þlter prepares the necessary low-noise voltage and drives the oscillator. The tapped oscillator output signal enters the VCO Feedback Filter.  The Synthesizer circuitry uses this feedback signal in the generation of correction pulses. The untapped output signal of the 970 MHz VCO enters the second LO injection circuit. 90.3 MHz Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO) The synthesizer within the LNODCT IC sets the 90.3 MHz signal. The 90.3 MHz VCO provides a LO signal to the LNODCT IC. The LNODCT uses this signal in up-converting and down-converting the feedback signal.  Regulator Circuitry The voltage regulator generates three regulated voltages: +3 Vdc, +5 Vdc and +11.7 Vdc. The regulator obtains input voltages from the +3.3 Vdc and +14.2 Vdc backplane voltages.  The regulated voltages power various ICs and RF devices in the Exciter. Linear RF Amplifier Stages The Linear RF AmpliÞer boosts the RF signal from the LNODCT IC. The RF AmpliÞer outputs an appropriate signal level to drive the PA.
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 3-11 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Exciter 3    cDIFFERENTIALDATA & CLOCKFROMBRC MODULEADDRESS BUSFROM CONTROLMODULESPI BUSTO/FROM CONTROLMODULEADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY, & A/DCONVERTER CIRCUITRYEXCITER IC CIRCUITRY 970 MHZ(1025 MHZ)VCO CIRCUITRYSYNTHESIZERCIRCUITRYLINEAR RF AMPLIFIERCIRCUITRY2ND LOINJECTIONCIRCUITRYMEMORYA/DCONVERTERCHIP SELECTDECODECIRCUITRYBOARD SELECTDECODECIRCUITRYVARIOUSSIGNALSTO MONITORSUPERFILTER+10 VCONTROL VOLTAGE(+2.5 TO +7.5 VDC)OSCILLATORCHARGEPUMP2.1 MHZVCO FEEDBACKCHIPSELECTSPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA)FROM BACKPLANEPHASELOCKEDLOOPICRINFINCHIPSELECT237 MHZ(180.6 MHZ)VCOCIRCUITRYOSCILLATORBUFFERAMPTRANLIN IC CIRCUITRYEXCITER ICBPFTISIC DATA & CLOCKLOW-PASSLOOPFILTERBUFFERVCOFEEDBACKFILTER1ST LOINJECTIONCIRCUITRYRF OUTPUTTO PA MODULETRANLIN ICIFOUTIFINRF FEEDBACKFROM PA MODULEBUFFERAMPBPFREGULATORCIRCUITRY+11.8 VREGULATOR+14.2 VFROMBACKPLANE+10 VSOURCE+11.8 VSOURCEANALOG+5 V SOURCE+5 VREGULATOR+10 VREGULATOR(U3702)EBTS283101597JNMNOTE: Where two frequencies are given, frequency without parentheses applies to 800 MHz BR only and frequency with parentheses applies to 900 MHz BR only.Exciter800 MHz FunctionalBlock DiagramFigure:3-4Exciter Functional Block Diagram
 3-12 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 ExciterExciterFunctional Block DiagramModel TLN3428SPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA)FROM BACKPLANEDSP DATA AND CLOCKFROM BRC MODULESPI BUSTO/FROMBRC MODULE700 MHZVCO CIRCUITRYSYNTHESIZERCIRCUITRYLINEAR RF AMPLIFIERCIRCUITRYAGC CIRCUITRYSUPERFILTER(Q3300)CONTROL VOLTAGE(+2.5 TO +7.5 VDC)OSCILLATOR(Q3301)CHARGEPUMP(Q3404, Q3405,Q3406, Q3407,Q3408)2.1 MHZVCO FEEDBACKPHASELOCKEDLOOP IC(U3400)RINFINAMP 4(Q4002, Q4003) AMP 3(Q4200, Q4201) AMP 2(Q3902, Q3903)236 MHZ VCOCIRCUITRYOSCILLATOR(Q3201)TRANLIN ICCIRCUITRYDSP DATA & CLOCKSPI BUS (DATA & CLOCK)LO-PASSLOOPFILTER(U3401)VCOFEEDBACKFILTER(U3400)RF OUTPUTTO PA MODULETRANLIN IC(U3600)IFOUTIFINRF FEEDBACKFROM PA MODULEOPEN LOOPALARMTO A/D INTEGRATION/ATTN DRIVERDIFF AMP(U3801,U3802)RF FEEDBACKFOR AGCDIFF AMPATTENUATORIMAGE FILTER(FL4000, FL4001CR4000, CR4002)1ST LOINJECTIONCIRCUITRY(L3201, C3206)CONTROL VOLTAGE(+2.5 TO +7.5 VDC)REFERENCEBUFFER(Q3401)AMP 1(Q3900, Q3901)EXCITER ICCIRCUITRY2ND LOINJECTIONCIRCUITRY(C4104, R3513)RF FEEDBACKFOR AGC DIFF AMPEXCITER IC(U3500)BAND-PASSFILTEREXTERNAL2.1 MHZREFERENCEFREQUENCYDOUBLER(U4100, T4100,CR4100)+10 VADDRESS BUSFROM BRCSPI BUSTO/FROM BRCADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY, & A/DCONVERTER CIRCUITRYMEMORY(U3006)A/DCONVERTER(U3100)BOARD SELECTDECODECIRCUITRY(U3000)VARIOUSSIGNALSTO MONITORCHIP SELECTCHIP SELECTDECODECIRCUITRY(U3000)REGULATORCIRCUITRY+14.2 VFROMBACKPLANE+10 VSOURCE+11.8 VSOURCEANALOG+5 V SOURCE+11.8 VREGULATOR(U3701)+10 VREGULATOR(U3702)+5 VREGULATOR(U3703)SUPERFILTER(Q3200)+10 VCHIP SELECTCHIP SELECTCHIP SELECTRESETRESET FROMBRC MODULEPOWERCONTROLCHIP SELECTFigure:3-5Exciter Functional Block Diagram
 68P81095E02-D   11/10/2000 3-13 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Exciter 3DIFFERENTIALDATA & CLOCKFROMBRC MODULEADDRESS BUSFROM CONTROLMODULESPI BUSTO/FROM CONTROLMODULEADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY, & A/DCONVERTER CIRCUITRYEXCITER IC CIRCUITRY 970 MHZ(1025 MHZ)VCO CIRCUITRYSYNTHESIZERCIRCUITRYLINEAR RF AMPLIFIERCIRCUITRY2ND LOINJECTIONCIRCUITRYMEMORYA/DCONVERTERCHIP SELECTDECODECIRCUITRYBOARD SELECTDECODECIRCUITRYVARIOUSSIGNALSTO MONITORSUPERFILTER+10 VCONTROL VOLTAGE(+2.5 TO +7.5 VDC)OSCILLATORCHARGEPUMP2.1 MHZVCO FEEDBACKCHIPSELECTSPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA)FROM BACKPLANEPHASELOCKEDLOOPICRINFINCHIPSELECT237 MHZ(180.6 MHZ)VCOCIRCUITRYOSCILLATORBUFFERAMPTRANLIN IC CIRCUITRYEXCITER ICBPFTISIC DATA & CLOCKLOW-PASSLOOPFILTERBUFFERVCOFEEDBACKFILTER1ST LOINJECTIONCIRCUITRYRF OUTPUTTO PA MODULETRANLIN ICIFOUTIFINRF FEEDBACKFROM PA MODULEBUFFERAMPBPFREGULATORCIRCUITRY+11.8 VREGULATOR+14.2 VFROMBACKPLANE+10 VSOURCE+11.8 VSOURCEANALOG+5 V SOURCE+5 VREGULATOR+10 VREGULATOR(U3702)EBTS283101597JNMNOTE: Where two frequencies are given, frequency without parentheses applies to 800 MHz BR only and frequency with parentheses applies to 900 MHz BR only.THIS PICTURE MUST BE CHANGED!SEE MARK-UPSFigure:3-6Exciter Functional Block DiagramExciter800 MHz QUAD ChannelFunctional Block
 68P81095E02-D   11/10/2000 3-14 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Exciter This Page IntentionallyLeft Blank
 68P81099E10 D   11/9/2000 4-1 y 4    Power Amplifier Overview This section provides technical information for the Power AmpliÞer (PA). Table 4-1 describes covered topics.  FRU Number to Kit Number Cross Reference Power Amplifer (PA) Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) are available for the iDEN EBTS. The FRU contains the PAkit and required packaging. Table 4-2 provides a cross reference between PA FRU numbers and kit numbers.  Table 4-1   Chapter Topics Chapter Page Description 40W, 800 MHz Ð TLF2020 (TTF1580);  70W, 800 MHz Ð TLN3335 (CTF1040); 60W, 900 MHz Ð CLN1355 (CLF1300); 40W, 1500 MHz Ð TLN3426 (TLN3426); 800 MHz QUAD Ð CLF1400 (CLF1400)4-2 Describes the functions and characteristics of the Base Radio Power AmpliÞer (PA) module for the single and QUAD Channel Base Radio (BR).40W, 800 MHz Power AmpliÞer Ð TLF2020 (TTF1580) 4-15 Functional Block Diagram for the 40 Watt, 800 MHz, Single Channel Base Radio Power AmpliÞer (PA)70W, 800 MHz Power AmpliÞer Ð TLN3335 (CTF1040) 4-16 Functional Block Diagram for the 70 Watt, 800 MHz, Single Channel Base Radio Power AmpliÞer (PA)60W, 900 MHz Power AmpliÞer Ð CLN1355 (CLF1300) 4-17 Functional Block Diagram for the 60 Watt, 900 MHz, Single Channel Base Radio Power AmpliÞer (PA)40W, 1500 MHz Power AmpliÞer Ð TLN3426 4-18 Functional Block Diagram for the 40 Watt, 1500 MHz, Single Channel Base Radio Power AmpliÞer (PA)800 MHz QUAD Carrier Power AmpliÞer 4-19 Functional Block Diagram for the 800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Power AmpliÞer (PA) Table 4-2   FRU Number to Kit Number Cross Referece Description FRU Number Kit Number 40 W, 800 MHz Single Channel Base Radio PA TLF2020 CLF177270 W, 800 MHz Single Channel Base Radio PA TLN3335 CLF177160 W, 900 MHz Single Channel Base Radio PA CLN1355 CLN712540 W, 1500 MHz Single Channel Base Radio PA TLN3426 TTG1000800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio PA CLF1499 CLF1400
 4-2 68P81099E10 D 11/9/2000 y 40W, 800 MHz Ð TLF2020 (TTF1580);  70W, 800 MHz Ð TLN3335 (CTF1040); 60W, 900 MHz Ð CLN1355 (CLF1300); 40W, 1500 MHz Ð TLN3426 (TLN3426); 800 MHz QUAD Ð CLF1400 (CLF1400) 40W, 800 MHz Ð TLF2020 (TTF1580); 70W, 800 MHz Ð TLN3335 (CTF1040);60W, 900 MHz Ð CLN1355 (CLF1300);40W, 1500 MHz Ð TLN3426 (TLN3426);800 MHz QUAD Ð CLF1400 (CLF1400) PA Overview The Power Amplifier (PA), together with the Exciter, provides transmitter functions for the QUAD Channel Base Radio.  The PA accepts the low-level modulated RF signal from the Exciter and amplifies the signal for transmission via the RF output connector. The 800 MHz Base Radio can be equipped with either 40 Watt PA, TLF2020 (version TTF1580) or 70 Watt PA, TLN3335 (version CTF1040). The 40W PA module consists of five hybrid modules, four pc boards, and a module heatsink/housing assembly.  The 70W PA module consists of eight hybrid modules, four pc boards, and a module heatsink/housing assembly. The 900 MHz Base Radio is equipped with 60 Watt PA, CLN1355 (kit no.  CLF1300A). The PA module consists of four hybrid modules, two pc boards, and a module heatsink/housing assembly.  The 1500 MHz Base Radio is equipped with 40 Watt PA, TLN3426. The PA module consists of four hybrid modules, two pc boards, and the module heatsink/housing assembly. The 800MHz Quad Base Radio is equipped with the Quad PA, CLF1400. The PA module consists of six hybrid modules, two pc boards, and the module heatsink/housing assembly. The PA connects to the chassis backplane using a 96-pin DIN connector and three blindmate RF connectors.  Two Torx screws located on the front of the PA hold it in the chassis.Specifications of the transmitter circuitry, including the Exciter and PAs, are provided in Base Radio Overview section.  Figure 4-1 shows the 70W, 800 MHz PA. Figure 4-2 shows the 60W, 900 MHz PA. Figure 4-3 shows the 40W, 1500 MHz PA.
 68P81099E10 D   11/9/2000 4-3 y 40W, 800 MHz Ð TLF2020 (TTF1580);  70W, 800 MHz Ð TLN3335 (CTF1040); 60W, 900 MHz Ð CLN1355 (CLF1300); 40W, 1500 MHz Ð TLN3426 (TLN3426); 800 MHz QUAD Ð CLF1400 (CLF1400)Figure:4-1 70W, 800 MHz PA Ð TLN3335 (with cover removed)NOTE:  70W PA shown.  40W PA is similar.
 4-4 68P81099E10 D 11/9/2000 y 40W, 800 MHz Ð TLF2020 (TTF1580);  70W, 800 MHz Ð TLN3335 (CTF1040); 60W, 900 MHz Ð CLN1355 (CLF1300); 40W, 1500 MHz Ð TLN3426 (TLN3426); 800 MHz QUAD Ð CLF1400 (CLF1400)Figure:4-2 60W, 900 MHz PA Ð CLN1355 (with cover removed)
 68P81099E10 D   11/9/2000 4-5 y 40W, 800 MHz Ð TLF2020 (TTF1580);  70W, 800 MHz Ð TLN3335 (CTF1040); 60W, 900 MHz Ð CLN1355 (CLF1300); 40W, 1500 MHz Ð TLN3426 (TLN3426); 800 MHz QUAD Ð CLF1400 (CLF1400)1.5GHZ-Z858Figure:4-3 40W, 1500 PA (with cover removed)
 4-6 68P81099E10 D 11/9/2000 y 40W, 800 MHz Ð TLF2020 (TTF1580);  70W, 800 MHz Ð TLN3335 (CTF1040); 60W, 900 MHz Ð CLN1355 (CLF1300); 40W, 1500 MHz Ð TLN3426 (TLN3426); 800 MHz QUAD Ð CLF1400 (CLF1400)Figure:4-4 QUAD Channel PA (with cover removed)
 68P81099E10 D   11/9/2000 4-7 y Theory of Operation Theory of Operation Table 4-3 describes the basic functions of the PA circuitry.  Figures 4-5, 4-6 and 4-9 show the functional block diagrams of 40W, 800 MHz PA; 70W, 800 MHz PA and the 800MHz, Quad PA, respectively. Figures 4-7 shows the functional block diagram of the 60W, 900 MHz PA. Figures 4-8 shows a functional block diagram of the 40W, 1500 MHz PA.  Table 4-3     Power Amplifier Circuitry   Circuit Description DC/Metering Board ¥ Serves as the main interface between the PA and the backplane board¥ Accepts RF input from the Exciter via a blindmate RF connector¥ Routes the RF input via a 50 ½ stripline to the Linear Driver Module RF amplifier¥ Routes the RF feedback from the RF Combiner/Peripheral Module to the Exciter via a blindmate RF connector¥ Provides digital alarm and metering information of the PA to the BRC via the SPI bus ¥ Routes DC power to the fans and PALinear Driver Module (LDM) ¥ Contains one Class AB stage which, in turn, drives a parallel Class AB stage¥ Amplifies the low-level RF signal ~25 mW average power from the Exciter via the DC/Metering Board (800MHz and 900MHz)¥ Amplifies the low-level RF signal ~8 mW average power from the Exciter via the DC/Metering Board  (1500MHz)¥ Provides an output of:~10 W (800MHz) average power~8 W (800MHz Quad) average power~17 W (900MHz) average power~16 W (1500MHz) average powerInterconnect Board(800 MHz only)¥ Provides RF interconnection from the LDM to the RF Splitter board¥ Provides DC supply filteringRF Splitter/DC board ¥ Interfaces with the DC/Metering Board to route DC power to the LFMs¥ Contains splitter circuits that split the RF output signal of the LDM to the three Linear Final Modules (40W, 800MHz)¥ Contains splitter circuits that split the RF output signal of the LDM to the six Linear Final Modules (70W, 800MHz and 800MHz Quad)¥ Contains a Quadrature splitter circuit to split the RF output signal of the LDM to the two Linear Final Modules (900 MHz and 1500 MHz)
 4-8 68P81099E10 D 11/9/2000 y Theory of Operation DC/Metering Board(Non-Quad) The DC/Metering Board provides the interface between the PA and the Base Radio backplane.  The preamplified/modulated RF signal is input directly from the Exciter via the Base Radio backplane. The RF input signal is applied to the input of the Linear Driver Module (LDM). The RF feedback signal is fed back to the Exciter, where it is monitored for errors. The primary function of the DC/Metering Boards is to monitor proper operation of the PA.  This information is forwarded to the Base Radio Controller (BRC) via the SPI bus.  The alarms diagnostic points monitored by the BRC on the PA include the following: ¥ Forward power Linear Final Module (LFM)¥ Each module contains two Class AB amplifiers in parallel. Each module amplifies one of three RF signals (~ 8 W average power) from the LDM (via the Splitter/DC board). Three LFMs provide a sum RF output of approximately 48 W average power. (40W,  800MHz)¥ Each module contains two Class AB amplifiers in parallel. Each module amplifies one of six RF signals (~ 8 W average power) from the LDM (via the Splitter/DC board). Six LFMs provide a sum RF output of approximately 97 W average power. (70W, 800MHz)¥ Each module contains two Class AB amplifiers in parallel. Each module amplifies one of six RF signals from the LDM (via the Splitter/DC board). Six LFMs sum to provide the final RF power. (800MHz Quad)¥ Each module contains two Class AB amplifiers in parallel. Each module amplifies one of two RF signals (~ 17 W average power) from the LDM (via the Splitter/DC board). Two LFMs provide a sum RF output of approximately 75 W average power. (900MHz)¥ Each module contains two Class AB amplifiers in parallel. Each module amplifies one of two RF signals (~ 16 W average power) from the LDM (via the Splitter/DC board). Two LFMs provide a sum RF output of approximately 28 W average power. (1500MHz)RF Interconnect Board(40W, 800 MHz PA only)¥ Contains three transmission lines that interconnect the LFMs to the RF Combiner/Peripheral ModuleCombiner Board(70W, 800 MHz PA and 800MHz Quad only)¥ Contains three separate Quadrature combiner circuits that respectively combine the six RF outputs from the LFMs into three signals. These three signals, in turn, are applied to the RF Combiner/Peripheral Module. RF Combiner/Peripheral Module ¥ Contains a combiner circuit that combines the three RF signals from the RF Interconnect Board (40W PA) or the Combiner Board (70W PA and Quad PA). It routes the combined RF signal through a circulator and a Low Pass Filter. The final output signal is routed to the blindmate RF connector (800 MHz)¥ Contains a Quadrature combiner circuit to combine the RF signal from the two LFMs. It routes the combined RF signal through a circulator and a Low Pass Filter. The output signal is routed to the blindmate RF connector (900 MHz and 1500 MHz)¥ Contains an RF coupler that provides an RF feedback signal to the Exciter via a blindmate RF connector. Also contains a forward and reverse power detector for alarm and power monitoring purposesFan Assembly ¥ Consists of three fans used to keep the PA within predetermined operating temperatures Table 4-3     Power Amplifier Circuitry  (Continued) Circuit Description
 68P81099E10 D   11/9/2000 4-9 y Theory of Operation ¥ Reflected power ¥ PA temperature sense DC/Metering Board (Quad only) The DC/Metering Board in the Quad Radio serves the same function as does other radios. However, its circuitry is modified to be compatible with the Quad Station. As such, the logic circuitry is 3.3V.In addition to the functions listed in the non-Quad version, the following metering points are ported to the SPI bus: ¥ A and B Currents ¥ Fan Sensor Linear Driver Module 800 MHz The Linear Driver Module (LDM) amplifies the low-level RF signal from the Exciter.  The LDM consists of a two-stage cascaded amplifier. The RF input signal applied to the LDM has an average power level of approximately 25 mW.  The LDM amplifies this signal to an average output level of approximately 10 Watts. (8W in Quad) The LDM output is fed to the RF Splitter/DC Distribution Board via an Interconnect Board. 900 MHz The Linear Driver Module (LDM) amplifies the low-level RF signal from the Exciter.  The LDM consists of a three-stage cascaded amplifier.  This output is fed directly to the RF Splitter/DC Distribution Board.The RF input signal applied to the LDM has an average power level of approximately 25 mW.  The LDM amplifies this signal to an average output level of approximately 17 Watts.  1500 MHz The Linear Driver Module (LDM) takes the low level RF signal and amplifies it. The LDM consists of a four stage cascaded amplifier. The RF input signal has an average power level of 8 mW. The LDM amplifies the input signal to an average output level of approximately 16 Watts. This output is fed directly to the RF Splitter/DC Distribution Board.The current drain of the Power Amplifiers is monitored by the A/D converter on the DC/Metering board. A voltage signal representative of the LDM current drain is sent to the BRC. A Power Amplifier alarm is generated if the signal is outside of either the upper or lower limits.
 4-10 68P81099E10 D 11/9/2000 y Theory of Operation Interconnect Board (800 MHz and 800MHz Quad only) The output of the LDM is applied to the Interconnect Board, which provides an RF connection to the RF Splitter/DC Distribution Board.  As a separate function, area on the Interconnect Board serves as a convenient mounting location for electrolytic capacitors used for filtering the +28 VDC supply.  RF Splitter/DC Distribution Board 800 MHz The RF Splitter portion of this board accepts the amplified signal from the LDM (via the Interconnect Board).  The primary function of this circuit is to split the RF signal into drive signals for the LFMs. In the 40W PA, this circuit splits the drive signal into three separate paths to be applied to the three LFMs, where the signals will be amplified further.  In the 70W PA and Quad PA, this circuit splits the drive signal into six separate paths to be applied to the six LFMs, where the signals will be amplified further.The DC Distribution portion of this board interfaces directly with the DC/Metering Board to route DC power to the LFMs.  900 MHz and 1500 MHz The RF Splitter portion of this board accepts the amplified signal from the LDM.  The primary function of this circuit is to split the RF signal into two separate paths.  These two outputs are fed directly to two separate Linear Final modules where the RF signals will be amplified further. The DC Distribution portion of this board interfaces directly with the DC/Metering Board to route DC power to the LFMs.  Linear Final Modules  800 MHz The RF Splitter output signals are applied directly into the LFMs for final amplification.  Each LFM contains parallel PAs that amplify the RF signals. In the 40W PA, the parallel LFMs amplify the input signals to a sum output level of approximately 48 Watts average power.  The amplified signal is then sent directly to the RF Interconnect Board.  In the 70W PA, the parallel LFMs amplify the input signals to a sum output level of approximately 97 Watts average power. In the Quad PA, the function is similar to the 70W PA. The amplified signal is then sent directly to the Combiner Board.  900 MHz The RF signals from the outputs of the RF Splitter are applied directly into the Linear Final Module (LFM) for final amplification.  Each LFM contains dual PAs that amplify the RF signals to a combined output level of approximately 75 Watts average power.  The amplified signal is then sent directly to the RF Combiner circuit for final distribution.
 68P81099E10 D   11/9/2000 4-11 y Theory of Operation 1500 MHzThe two RF signals from the outputs of the RF Splitter are input directly into the Linear Final Module (LFM) for final amplification. Each LFM contains dual power amplifiers that amplify the RF signals to an output equal to approximately 28 Watts average power. The amplified signal is then sent directly to the RF Combiner circuit for final distribution. The current drain of the Power Amplifiers is monitored by the A/D converter on the DC/Metering board. A voltage signal representative of the LFM current drain is sent to the BRC. A Power Amplifier alarm is generated if the signal is outside of either the upper or lower limits. RF Interconnect Board (40W, 800 MHz PA Only) The RF Interconnect Board consists of transmission line paths which route the three output signals from the LFMs to the three inputs of the RF Combiner/Peripheral Module. Combiner Board (70W, 800 MHz PA and 800MHz Quad PA Only) The Combiner Board combines pairs of signals into single signals, thereby combining the six signals from the LDMs into three signals.  The resulting three signals are applied to the RF Combiner/Peripheral Module. RF Combiner/Peripheral Module 800 MHz and 800MHz Quad This module consists of two portions: an RF combiner and a peripheral module.  The RF Combiner portion of the module combines the three RF signals from the RF Interconnect Board (40W PA) or the Combiner Board (70W PA) into a single signal using a Wilkinson coupler arrangement. Following the combiner circuit, the single combined RF signal is then passed through a directional coupler which derives a signal sample of the LFM RF power output.  Via the coupler, a sample of the RF output signal is fed to the Exciter as a feedback signal.  Following the coupler, the power output signal is passed through a circulator, which protects the PA in the event of high reflected power. The peripheral portion of the module provides a power monitor circuit that monitors the forward and reflected power of the output signal.  This circuit furnishes the A/D converter on the DC/Metering Board with input signals representative of the forward and reflected power levels.  For forward power, a signal representative of the measured value is sent to the BRC via the SPI bus.  The BRC determines if this level is within tolerance of the programmed forward power level.  If the level is not within parameters, the BRC will issue a warning to the site controller which, in turn, will shut down the Exciter if required.Reflected power is monitored in the same manner.  The BRC uses the reflected power to calculate the voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR).  If the VSWR is determined to be excessive, the forward power is rolled back.  .  If it is extremely excessive, the BRC issues a shut-down command to the Exciter.
 4-12 68P81099E10 D 11/9/2000 y Theory of Operation A thermistor is located on the RF Combiner/Peripheral module to monitor the operating temperature of the PA.  The thermistor signal indicating excessive temperature is applied to the A/D converter and then sent to the BRC.  The BRC rolls back forward power if the monitored temperature is excessive. 900 MHz The combined LFM output is applied to this module.  The RF signal is first passed through a directional coupler which derives a signal sample of the LFM RF power output.  Via the coupler, a sample of the RF output signal is fed to the Exciter as a feedback signal, thereby allowing the Exciter to accordingly adjust signal drive. Following the coupler, the power output signal is passed through a circulator, which protects the PA in the event of high reflected power.  A power monitor circuit monitors the forward and reflected power of the output signal.  This circuit furnishes the A/D converter on the DC/Metering Board with input signals representative of the forward and reflected power levels. For forward power, a signal representative of the measured value is sent to the BRC via the SPI bus.  The BRC determines if this level is within tolerance of the programmed forward power level.  If the level is not within parameters, the BRC will issue a warning to the site controller which, in turn, will shut down the Exciter if required.Reflected power is monitored in the same manner.  The BRC uses the reflected power to calculate the voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR).  If the VSWR is determined to be excessive, the forward power is rolled back.  If it is extremely excessive, the BRC issues a shut-down command to the Exciter.A thermistor is located on the RF Combiner/Peripheral module to monitor the operating temperature of the PA.  A voltage representative of the monitored temperature is sent from the A/D converter to the BRC.  The BRC rolls back forward power if the monitored temperature is excessive. 1500 MHz Both LFM outputs are input into this module where they are combined for a single output signal. The RF signal is first coupled to the Exciter module so that it can be monitored. The RF output signal is then passed through a circulator that acts as a protection device for the PA in the event of reflected power. A power monitor circuit monitors the forward and reflected power of the output signal. This circuit provides the A/D converter on the DC/Metering board with an input signal representative of the forward or reflected power levels. For forward power, a signal representative of the measured value is sent to the BRC module via the SPI bus. The BRC determines if this level is within tolerance of the programmed forward power level. The programmed forward power is set through the use of MMI commands. If the level is not within certain parameters, the BRC will issue a warning to the site controller and may shut-down the Exciter module.Reflected power is monitored in the same manner except that the BRC determines an acceptable reflected power level. The BRC calculates the reflected power through an algorithm stored in memory. If the reflected power is determined to be excessive, the forward power is rolled back. If the reflected power level is extremely excessive, the BRC will issues a shut-down command to the Exciter module.
 68P81099E10 D   11/9/2000 4-13 y Theory of Operation A thermistor is located on the RF Combiner/Peripheral module to monitor the operating temperature of the Power Amplifier. A voltage representative of the monitored temperature is sent from the A/D converter to the BRC. The BRC issues a cut-back command to the Exciter module if the monitored temperature is greater than 121û F (85û C). Fan Module The PA contains a fan assembly to maintain normal operating temperature through the use of a cool air intake.  The fan assembly consists of three individual fans in which airflow is directed across the PA heatsink.  The current draw of the fans is monitored by the DC/Metering Board.  A voltage representative of the current draw is monitored by the BRC.  The BRC flags the iSC if an alarm is triggered.  The PA LED on the front panel of the BRC also lights, however the PA does not shut down.
 4-14 68P81099E10 D 11/9/2000 y This Page IntentionallyLeft Blank
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 4-15 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Power Amplifier 4DCFILTERADDRESS BUSFROM BRCSPI BUSTO/FROM BRCADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY,& A/D CONVERTER CIRCUITRYMEMORYBOARD SELECTDECODECIRCUITRYCHIPSELECTCHIP SELECTDECODECIRCUITRYCHIP SELECTRF INPUTRF OUTTO ANTENNARF FEEDBACKTO EXCITERMODULEEBTS611051398LLNCLK/DATAA/DCONVERTERLINEAR DRIVER MODULECLASS AB STAGE 2CLASS ABINTERCONNECTBOARD+28 VDCPA TEMP SENSERF COMBINER/PERIPHERAL MODULELOW-PASSFILTERREF PWRFWD PWRFAN SENSETEMPERATURESENSORCIRCULATOR50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOADFAN ASSEMBLYRFINTERCONNECTBOARDLINEAR FINALMODULESRF SPLITTER/DC DISTRIBUTION BOARDSTAGE 3CLASS AB50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOADSTAGE1Figure:4-5TLF2020 (TTF1580B)  40 W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 1)40W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier – TLF2020 (TTF1580)Functional Block Diagram
 4-16 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Power Amplifier  COMBINERBOARDLINEAR DRIVER MODULELINEAR FINALMODULES50 OHMLOADADDRESS BUSFROM BRCSPI BUSTO/FROM BRCADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY,& A/D CONVERTER CIRCUITRYMEMORYA/DCONVERTERBOARD SELECTDECODECIRCUITRYPA TEMP SENSECHIPSELECTCHIP SELECTDECODECIRCUITRYCHIP SELECTRF COMBINER/PERIPHERAL MODULELOW-PASSFILTERRF INPUTRF OUTTO ANTENNARF FEEDBACKTO EXCITERMODULEREF PWRFWD PWRFAN SENSEFAN ASSEMBLYTEMPERATURESENSOREBTS417120497JNMCLK/DATACIRCULATOR50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOADSTAGE1CLASS AB STAGE 2CLASS ABRF SPLITTER/DC DISTRIBUTION BOARDINTERCONNECTBOARDSTAGE 3CLASS AB50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOADDCFILTER+28 VDCFigure:4-6TLN3335 (CTF1040) 70 W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 1)70W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier – TLN3335 (CTF1040)Functional Block Diagram
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 4-17 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Power AmplifierLINEAR DRIVER MODULE RF SPLITTER/DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD50 OHMLOADLINEAR FINAL MODULE50 OHMLOADLINEAR FINAL MODULE50 OHMLOADADDRESS BUSFROM BRCSPI BUSTO/FROM BRCADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY,& A/D CONVERTER CIRCUITRYMEMORYA/DCONVERTERBOARD SELECTDECODECIRCUITRYPA TEMP SENSECHIPSELECTCHIP SELECTDECODECIRCUITRYCHIP SELECTRF COMBINER/PERIPHERAL MODULELOW-PASSFILTERRF INPUTRF OUTTO ANTENNARF FEEDBACKTO EXCITERMODULEREF PWRFWD PWRFAN SENSEFAN ASSEMBLYTEMPERATURESENSOREBTS326011497JNMCLK/DATACIRCULATOR50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOAD 50 OHMLOADSTAGE1STAGE3STAGE2CLASS A CLASS AB CLASS AB50 OHMLOADFigure:4-760W, 900 MHz Power Amplifier Functional Block Diagram(Sheet 1 of 1)60W, 900 MHz Power Amplifier – CLN1355 (CLF1300)Functional Block Diagram
 4-18 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Power AmplifierPower AmplifierFunctional Block DiagramModel TLN3426LINEAR DRIVER MODULETLG4020STAGE1STAGE3STAGE4RF SPLITTER/DC DISTRIBUTION BOARDTLG402350 OHMLOADSTAGE2(Q5433)LINEAR FINAL MODULETLG4021(Q5433)50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOAD(Q5417)LINEAR FINAL MODULETLG4021(Q5417)50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOADADDRESS BUSFROM BRCSPI BUSTO/FROM BRCADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY,& A/D CONVERTER CIRCUITRYMEMORY(U5004)A/DCONVERTER(U5100)BOARD SELECTDECODECIRCUITRY(U5000)PA TEMP SENSECHIPSELECTCHIP SELECTDECODECIRCUITRY(U5000)CHIP SELECTRF COMBINER/PERIPHERAL MODULETLG402250 OHMLOADLOW-PASSFILTERRF INPUTRF OUTTO ANTENNARF FEEDBACKTO EXCITERMODULEREF PWRFWD PWR50 OHMLOADCIRCULATORFAN SENSELDM/LFM CURRENT SENSEFAN ASSEMBLYFAN FANFANLFM CURRENT SENSELDM CURRENT SENSETEMPERATURESENSOR(RT5401)CLASS A CLASS AB CLASS AB CLASS ABFigure:4-8Power Amplifier 40W, 1500 MHz Power Amplifier – TLN3426 Functional Block Diagram
 68P81095E02-D   11/9//2000 4-19 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Power Amplifier 4COMBINERBOARDLINEAR DRIVER MODULELINEAR FINALMODULES50 OHMLOADADDRESS BUSFROM BRCSPI BUSTO/FROM BRCADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY,& A/D CONVERTER CIRCUITRYMEMORYA/DCONVERTERBOARD SELECTDECODECIRCUITRYPA TEMP SENSECHIPSELECTCHIP SELECTDECODECIRCUITRYCHIP SELECTRF COMBINER/PERIPHERAL MODULELOW-PASSFILTERRF INPUTRF OUTTO ANTENNARF FEEDBACKTO EXCITERMODULEREF PWRFWD PWRFAN SENSEFAN ASSEMBLYTEMPERATURESENSOREBTS417120497JNMCLK/DATACIRCULATOR50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOADSTAGE1CLASS AB STAGE 2CLASS ABRF SPLITTER/DC DISTRIBUTION BOARDINTERCONNECTBOARDSTAGE 3CLASS AB50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOAD50 OHMLOADDCFILTER+28 VDCFigure:4-9QUAD Channel Power Amplifier Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 1) 800 MHz QUAD Carrier Power AmplifierFunctional Block DiagramDUAL Stage Isolator
 This Page IntentionallyLeft Blank 4-20 68P81095E02-D   11/9//2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Power Amplifier
 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 5-21 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios   5   DC Power Supply Overview This section provides technical information for the DC Power Supply (PS). Table 5-1 describes covered topics.  FRU Number to Kit Number Cross Reference DC Power Supply Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) are available for the iDEN EBTS. The FRU contains the Power Supply kit and required packaging. Table 5-2 provides a cross reference between Exciter FRU numbers and kit numbers.  Table 5-1   Chapter Topics Chapter Page Description DC Power Supply for Single Channel Base Radios 5-22 Describes the functions and characteristics of the DC Power Supply (PS) module for the single channel Base Radio (BR).Single Channel DC Power Supply 5-29 Describes the functions and characteristics of the DC Power Supply (PS) module for the QUAD channel Base Radio (BR).Single Channel DC Power Supply 5-30 Functional Block Diagram for the Single Channel DC Power Supply (PS)QUAD Channel Power Supply 5-31 Functional Block Diagram for the QUAD Channel DC Power Supply (PS) Table 5-2   FRU Number to Kit Number Cross Referece Description FRU Number Kit Number Single Channel DC Power Supply  TLN3338 CPN1027QUAD Channel DC Power Supply CLN1498 CLF1550
 5-22 68P81095E02-D 4/16/99 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 DC Power Supply for Single Channel Base Radios   DC Power Supply for Single Channel Base Radios DC Power Supply Overview The DC Power Supply provides DC operating voltages to QUAD Channel Base Radio FRUs. The power supply accepts input voltage sources from 41Vdc to 60Vdc. Input sources may be either positively or negatively grounded.On initial startup, the supply requires a nominal 43 Vdc. If the voltage drops below 41 V, the DC Power Supply enters quiescent mode. In quiescent mode, the power supply outputs no power.The DC Power Supply is designed for sites with an available DC voltage source. Output voltages from the DC Power Supply are 28.6 Vdc, 14.2 Vdc and 5.1 Vdc, with reference to output ground. The supply is rated for 575 Watts of continuous output power, with up to 113û F (45û C) inlet air. At 140û F (60û C), the 28.6 Vdc output reduces to 80% of maximum power. The DC Power Supply consists of the Power Supply and front panel hardware. The DC Power Supply connects to the chassis backplane through an edgecard connector. Two Torx screws on the front panel secure the DC power supply to the chassis.Figure 5-1 shows the DC Power Supply with the cover removed. Controls and Indicators Table 5-3 summarizes LED indications on the DC Power Supply during normal operation. The ON/OFF switch behind the front panel turns DC power supply on and off. Performance Specifications  Table 5-4 lists the speciÞcations for the DC Power Supply. Table 5-3 DC Power Supply Indicators LED Condition Indications Green Solid (on) Power Supply is on, and operating under normal conditions with no alarmsOff Power Supply is turned off or required power is not availableRed Solid (on) Power Supply fault or load fault on any output, or input voltage is out of rangeOff Power Supply is operating normally, with no alarms
 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 5-23 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios DC Power Supply for Single Channel Base Radios   Table 5-4 DC Power Supply Specifications   Description Value or Range Operating Temperature 0¡ to +40¡ C (no derating)+41¡ to +60¡ C (derating)Input Voltage 41 to 60 VdcInput Polarity Positive (+) ground systemStartup Voltage 43 Vdc (minimum)Input Current 15.6 A (maximum) @ 41 VdcSteady State Output Voltages 28.6 Vdc +5%14.2 Vdc +5%5.1 Vdc +5%Total Output Power Rating 575 W (no derating)485 W (derating)Figure:5-1DC Power Supply
 5-24 68P81095E02-D 4/16/99 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 DC Power Supply for Single Channel Base Radios   Theory of Operation Table 5-5 brießy describes the basic DC Power Supply circuitry. Figure 5-3 shows the functional block diagrams for the DC Power Supply. Output Ripple All outputs 50mV p-p (measured with 20 MHz BW oscilloscope at 25¡C)High Frequency individual harmonic voltage limits (10kHz to 100MHz) are:28.6 Vdc 1.5 mV p-p14.2 Vdc  3.0 mV p-p5.1 Vdc 5.0 mV p-pShort Circuit Current 0.5 A average (maximum) Table 5-5 DC Power Supply Circuitry  Circuit Description Input Circuit Routes input current from the DC power input cable through the high current printed circuit edge connector, EMI Þlter, panel mounted combination circuit breaker, and on/off switchStartup Inverter CircuitryProvides Vdc for power supply circuitry during initial power-upMain Inverter Circuitry Consists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +28.6 Vdc supply voltageTemperature Protection The Power Supply contains a built-in cooling fan that runs whenever the supply is powered on. The supply shuts down if the temperature exceeds a preset threshold+14.2 Vdc Secondary Converter CircuitryConsists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +14.2 Vdc supply voltage+5 Vdc Secondary Converter CircuitryConsists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +5.1 Vdc supply voltageClock Generator CircuitryGenerates the 267 kHz and 133 kHz clock signals used by the pulse width modulators in the four inverter circuitsAddress Decode, Memory, & A/D ConverterServes as the main interface between A/D on the Power Supply and the BRC via the SPI bus Table 5-4 DC Power Supply Specifications  (Continued) Description Value or Range
 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 5-25 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios DC Power Supply for QUAD Channel Base Radios   DC Power Supply for QUAD Channel Base Radios QUAD Channel Power Supply Overview The QUAD Channel DC Power Supply provides DC operating voltages to QUAD Channel Base Radio FRUs. The power supply accepts input voltage sources from 41Vdc to 60Vdc. Input sources may be either positively or negatively grounded.On initial startup, the supply requires a nominal 43 Vdc. If the voltage drops below 41 V, the QUAD Channel DC Power Supply enters quiescent mode. In quiescent mode, the power supply outputs no power.The QUAD Channel DC Power Supply is designed for sites with an available DC voltage source. Output voltages from the DC Power Supply are 28.6 Vdc, 14.2 Vdc and 3.3 Vdc, with reference to output ground. The supply is rated for 575 Watts of continuous output power, with up to 113û F (45û C) inlet air. At 140û F (60û C), the 28.6 Vdc output reduces to 80% of maximum power. The QUAD Channel DC Power Supply consists of the Power Supply and front panel hardware. The QUAD Channel DC Power Supply connects to the chassis backplane through an edgecard connector. Two Torx screws on the front panel secure the QUAD Channel DC power supply to the chassis.Figure 5-2 shows the QUAD Channel Power Supply with the cover removed. Controls and Indicators Table 5-6 summarizes LED indications on the QUAD Channel DC Power Supply during normal operation. The ON/OFF switch behind the front panel turns DC power supply on and off. Performance Specifications  Table 5-7 lists the speciÞcations for the QUAD Channel DC Power Supply. Table 5-6 DC Power Supply Indicators LED Condition Indications Green Solid (on) Power Supply is on, and operating under normal conditions with no alarmsOff Power Supply is turned off or required power is not availableRed Solid (on) Power Supply fault or load fault on any output, or input voltage is out of rangeOff Power Supply is operating normally, with no alarms
 5-26 68P81095E02-D 4/16/99 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 DC Power Supply for QUAD Channel Base Radios   Table 5-7 DC Power Supply Specifications   Description Value or Range Operating Temperature 0¡ to +40¡ C (no derating)+41¡ to +60¡ C (derating)Input Voltage 41 to 60 VdcInput Polarity Positive (+) ground systemStartup Voltage 43 Vdc (minimum)Input Current 18.0 A (maximum) @ 41 VdcSteady State Output Voltages 28.6 Vdc +5%14.2 Vdc +5%3.3 Vdc +5%Total Output Power Rating 575 W (no derating)485 W (derating)Figure:5-2Quad Carrier Power Supply
 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 5-27 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios DC Power Supply for QUAD Channel Base Radios   Theory of Operation Table 5-8 brießy describes the basic DC Power Supply circuitry. Figure 5-5 shows the functional block diagrams for the DC Power Supply. Output Ripple All outputs 150mV p-p (measured with 20 MHz BW oscilloscope at 25¡C)High Frequency individual harmonic voltage limits (10kHz to 100MHz) are:28.6 Vdc 1.5 mV p-p14.2 Vdc  3.0 mV p-p3.3 Vdc 5.0 mV p-pShort Circuit Current 0.5 A average (maximum) Table 5-8 DC Power Supply Circuitry  Circuit Description Input Circuit Routes input current from the DC power input cable through the high current printed circuit edge connector, EMI Þlter, panel mounted combination circuit breaker, and on/off switchStartup Inverter CircuitryProvides Vdc for power supply circuitry during initial power-upMain Inverter Circuitry Consists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +28.6 Vdc supply voltageTemperature Protection The Power Supply contains a built-in cooling fan that runs whenever the supply is powered on. The supply shuts down if the temperature exceeds a preset threshold+14.2 Vdc Secondary Converter CircuitryConsists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +14.2 Vdc supply voltage+3.3 Vdc Secondary Converter CircuitryConsists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +3.3 Vdc supply voltageClock Generator CircuitryGenerates the 267 kHz and 133 kHz clock signals used by the pulse width modulators in the four inverter circuitsAddress Decode, Memory, & A/D ConverterServes as the main interface between A/D on the Power Supply and the BRC via the SPI bus Table 5-7 DC Power Supply Specifications  (Continued) Description Value or Range
 5-28 68P81095E02-D 11/9/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 This Page IntentionallyLeft Blank
 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 5-29 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios DC Power Supply   5   Single Channel DC Power Supply+5.1 V INVERTER CIRCUITRYFETDRIVERPOWER FETSWITCH FILTERCIRCUITRYVCCVCC+ 5V OVERCURRENTDETECTREFREFSURGE CURRENTDELAY REFOVERVOLTAGEDETECTFETCROWBARCIRCUIT+ 28V BULKPULSEWIDTHMODULATORA24253031+5.1 V DCTOSTATIONMODULESVIABACKPLANEP/OBACKPLANECONNECTOR+5.1 V÷ 2CLOCK GENERATOR CIRCUITRYSTARTUP INVERTER CIRCUITRYBULK DETECTTODIAGNOSTICSCIRCUITRYPULSEWIDTHMODULATORVCCVCC STARTUP ISOLATIONTRANSFORMER+14.2 V INVERTER CIRCUITRYFETDRIVERPOWER FETSWITCH FILTERCIRCUITRYVCCVCC+ 14.2V OVERCURRENTDETECTREFREFSURGE CURRENTDELAY REFOVERVOLTAGEDETECTFETCROWBARCIRCUITA16172223+14.2V DCTOSTATIONMODULESVIABACKPLANEP/OBACKPLANECONNECTOR+14.2V+14.2VPULSEWIDTHMODULATORPULSEWIDTHMODULATORFRONT PANELON / OFFSWITCHEXTERNALDC INPUT41-60 VDCFILTERCIRCUITRYINPUT FILTER BOARD341415+28.6 VDCTOSTATIONMODULESVIABACKPLANEP/OBACKPLANECONNECTORMAIN INVERTER CIRCUITRYREFREFCURRENTDETECT A+28.6 V  OVERVOLTAGEDETECT+28 V BULK TODIAGNOSTICSCIRCUITRYOVERCURRENTDETECT+28.6 VDCCLOCKGENERATORCIRCUITRY267 KHZTRANSISTORSWITCHBMAIN ISOLATIONTRANSFORMERTRANSISTORDRIVERSSOFTSTARTCIRCUITRYSHUTDOWNA+12V STARTUP BIAS+12V STARTUP BIASVCCVCCMOD FAIL133 KHZ267 KHZ133 KHZ133 KHZ133 KHZ133 KHZ133 KHZ267 KHZ133 KHZ267 KHZ133 KHZPOWER FETSWITCHES FILTERINGCIRCUITRY+28 V BULKEBTS323011497JNMFigure:5-3DC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram(Sheet 1 of 2)
 5-30 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 DC Power Supply  A/DCONVERTERCOOLINGFANTHERMISTORMOUNTED ONHEATSINKSPI BUSREFREFREFMOD FAILINPUT FAILHEATSINK DIAGVBAT DIAGBAT TEMP+5.1 V+14.2V DIAG+5.1 V DIAG+28.6 V DIAGREFREFHEATSINK STATUSDETECTHI-TEMPDETECTBULK DETECTFROM STARTUPINVERTERCIRCUITRY(FOR AC ONLY)FROM BATTERYCHARGER/REVERTCIRCUITRYFROMDETECTCIRCUITRYABINPUT GOOD(GREEN)MODULEFAIL(RED)3SPI BUSTO/FROMSTATION CONTROLMODULEADDRESS DECODE CIRCUITRYADDRESSDECODECIRCUITRYFROMSTATIONCONTROLBOARD 9P/O ADDRESS BUS ENABLE ENABLEDIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRYT°EBTS324012097JNMJ300REFDC Power SupplyFigure:5-4DC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram(Sheet 2 of 2)
 5-31 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 DC Power Supply  Figure:5-5QUAD Channel DC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram(Sheet 1 of 2)QUAD Channel Power Supply+3.3 V INVERTER CIRCUITRYFETDRIVERPOWER FETSWITCH FILTERCIRCUITRYVCCVCC+ 3.3V OVERCURRENTDETECTREFREFSURGE CURRENTDELAY REFOVERVOLTAGEDETECTFETCROWBARCIRCUIT+ 28V BULKPULSEWIDTHMODULATORA24253031+3.3 V DCTOSTATIONMODULESVIABACKPLANEP/OBACKPLANECONNECTOR+3.3 V÷ 2CLOCK GENERATOR CIRCUITRYSTARTUP INVERTER CIRCUITRYBULK DETECTTODIAGNOSTICSCIRCUITRYPULSEWIDTHMODULATORVCCVCC STARTUP ISOLATIONTRANSFORMER+14.2 V INVERTER CIRCUITRYFETDRIVERPOWER FETSWITCH FILTERCIRCUITRYVCCVCC+ 14.2V OVERCURRENTDETECTREFREFSURGE CURRENTDELAY REFOVERVOLTAGEDETECTFETCROWBARCIRCUITA16172223+14.2V DCTOSTATIONMODULESVIABACKPLANEP/OBACKPLANECONNECTOR+14.2V+14.2VPULSEWIDTHMODULATORPULSEWIDTHMODULATORFRONT PANELON / OFFSWITCHEXTERNALDC INPUT41-60 VDCFILTERCIRCUITRYINPUT FILTER BOARD341415+28.6 VDCTOSTATIONMODULESVIABACKPLANEP/OBACKPLANECONNECTORMAIN INVERTER CIRCUITRYREFREFCURRENTDETECT A+28.6 V  OVERVOLTAGEDETECT+28 V BULK TODIAGNOSTICSCIRCUITRYOVERCURRENTDETECT+28.6 VDCCLOCKGENERATORCIRCUITRY267 KHZTRANSISTORSWITCHBMAIN ISOLATIONTRANSFORMERTRANSISTORDRIVERSSOFTSTARTCIRCUITRYSHUTDOWNA+12V STARTUP BIAS+12V STARTUP BIASVCCVCCMOD FAIL133 KHZ267 KHZ133 KHZ133 KHZ133 KHZ133 KHZ133 KHZ267 KHZ133 KHZ267 KHZ133 KHZPOWER FETSWITCHES FILTERINGCIRCUITRY+28 V BULKEBTS323Q101900 spf
 5-32 68P81095E02-D   11/9/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 DC Power Supply  Figure:5-6QUAD Channel DC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram(Sheet 2 of 2)QUAD Channel DC Power SupplyA/DCONVERTERCOOLINGFANTHERMISTORMOUNTED ONHEATSINKSPI BUSREFREFREFMOD FAILINPUT FAILHEATSINK DIAGVBAT DIAGBAT TEMP+3.3 V+14.2V DIAG+3.3 V DIAG+28.6 V DIAGREFREFHEATSINK STATUSDETECTHI-TEMPDETECTULK DETECTOM STARTUPINVERTERCIRCUITRY(FOR AC ONLY)FROM BATTERYCHARGER/REVERTCIRCUITRYFROMDETECTCIRCUITRYABINPUT GOOD(GREEN)MODULEFAIL(RED)3SPI BUSTO/FROMSTATION CONTROLMODULEADDRESS DECODE CIRCUITRYADDRESSDECODECIRCUITRY9P/O ADDRESS BUS  ENABLE  ENABLEDIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRYT°EBTS324Q101900spfJ300REF
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 6-33 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios   6   AC Power Supply AC Power Supply Overview The AC Power Supply provides DC operating voltages for the Base Radio FRUs.   The AC Power Supply accepts an AC input (90 to 280 Vac @ 47 to 63 Hz) to generate three output voltages: 28.6 Vdc, 14.2 Vdc and 5.1 Vdc with reference to output ground.  The AC Power Supply automatically adjusts to the AC input ranges and supplies a steady output.The AC Power Supply contains several switching-type power supply circuits, power factor correction circuitry, battery charger/revert circuitry, diagnostics and monitoring circuitry. The battery charging/revert circuitry charges an external storage battery and automatically reverts to battery power in case of an AC power failure. The Power Supply interconnects to the chassis backplane using an edgecard connector.  Two Torx screws on the front panel of the AC Power Supply secure it in the chassis.Figure 6-1 shows the front view of the AC Power Supply. Controls and Indicators Table 6-1 lists and describes the indicators of the AC Power Supply.  The power ON/OFF switch is used to turn the power supply on and off.  Performance Specifications Table 6-2 lists the speciÞcations for the AC Power Supply. Table 6-1 AC Power Supply Indicators LED Condition Indications Green Solid (on) Power Supply under normal operation with no alarms (the red LED is normally off when this LED is lit)Off Power Supply is turned off or required power is not availableRed Solid (on) In battery revert mode, Power Supply fault, or load fault on any outputOff The Power Supply is under normal operation with no alarms
 6-34 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2   Table 6-2 AC Power Supply Specifications Description Value or Range Operating Temperature -30¡ to +45¡ C (no derating)-30¡ to +60¡ C (derating)Input Voltage 90 to 280 VacInput Frequency Range 47 to 63 HzInput Current 8.5 A (maximum)Steady State Output Voltages 28.6 Vdc +5%14.2 Vdc +5%5.1 Vdc +5%Total Output Power Rating 625 W (no derating)*595 W (derating)*Battery Charging Voltage Range 26 to 32.5 VdcFigure:6-1AC Power Supply (front view)
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 6-35 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios   Theory of Operation Table 6-3 brießy describes the basic AC Power Supply circuitry.  Figure 6-2 shows the functional block diagrams for the AC Power Supply. Output Ripple All outputs 50 mV p-p (measured with 20 MHz BW oscilloscope at 25¡C)High Frequency individual harmonic voltage limits (10 kHz to 100 MHz) are:28.6 Vdc 1.5 mV p-p14.2 Vdc 3 mV p-p5.1 Vdc 5 mV p-pShort Circuit Current 0.5 A average (maximum) * Includes 50 W for the battery charger. Table 6-3 AC Power Supply Circuitry  Circuit Description Input Conditioning CircuitryConsists of ac line transient protection, EMI Þltering, rectiÞer, power factor correction circuitry, and ÞlteringStart-up Inverter CircuitryProvides Vcc for power supply circuitry during initial power-upMain Inverter Circuitry Consists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +28.6Vdc supply voltageTemperature Protection Contains a built-in thermostatically controlled cooling fan.  The Power Supply shuts down if temperature exceeds a preset threshold+14.2 Vdc Secondary Converter CircuitryConsists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +14.2 Vdc supply voltage+5 Vdc Secondary Converter CircuitryConsists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +5 Vdc supply voltageClock Generator CircuitryGenerates 267 kHz and 133 kHz clock signals for the pulse width modulators in the four inverter circuitsDiagnostics Circuitry Converts analog status signals to digital format for transfer to BRCAddress Decode, Memory, & A/D ConverterServes as the main interface between A/D and D/A on the Power Supply and the BRC via the SPI busBattery Charging/Revert CircuitryOffers features such as output short circuit protection, reversed battery protection, ambient battery temperature monitoring, and immediate revert to battery backup leaving no interruption of station operationIn the event of an AC power failure, a battery revert relay is energized which places the storage battery on the +28 V bus which maintains station operation under backup power. An SCR in parallel with the relay contacts provides instant battery revert and protection for the relay contacts against arcing Table 6-2 AC Power Supply Specifications Description Value or Range
 6-36 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 This Page IntentionallyLeft Blank
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 6-37 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios AC Power Supply   6   6   CLOCK GENERATOR CIRCUITRYSTARTUP INVERTER CIRCUITRYBULK DETECTTODIAGNOSTICSCIRCUITRYVCCVCC STARTUP ISOLATIONTRANSFORMERFRONT PANELON / OFFSWITCHAC INPUT47 - 60 HZ90V / 280V ACINPUT FILTER BOARD341415+28.6 VDCTOSTATIONMODULESVIABACKPLANEP/OBACKPLANECONNECTORMAIN INVERTER CIRCUITRYREFREFA+28.6 V  OVERVOLTAGEDETECT+28 V BULK TODIAGNOSTICSCIRCUITRYOVERCURRENTDETECT+28.6 VDCTRANSISTORSWITCHBMAIN ISOLATIONTRANSFORMERSOFTSTARTCIRCUITRYSHUTDOWNA+12V STARTUP BIAS+12V STARTUP BIASVCCVCCMOD FAIL133 KHZ133 KHZ133 KHZ267 KHZ133 KHZ267 KHZ133 KHZCLOCKGENERATORCIRCUITRY267 KHZPULSEWIDTHMODULATOR+5.1V INVERTER CIRCUITRYVCC VCC+ 5V OVERCURRENTDETECTREFREFSURGE CURRENTDELAY REFOVERVOLTAGEDETECTFETCROWBARCIRCUIT+ 28V BULKA24253031+5.1V DCTOSTATIONMODULESVIABACKPLANEP/OBACKPLANECONNECTOR+5.1V133 KHZFILTERCIRCUITRYPOWER FETSWITCHFETDRIVERPULSEWIDTHMODULATOR+14.2 V INVERTER CIRCUITRYVCC VCC+ 14.2V OVERCURRENTDETECTREFREFSURGE CURRENTDELAY REFOVERVOLTAGEDETECTFETCROWBARCIRCUITA16172223+14.2V DCTOSTATIONMODULESVIABACKPLANEP/OBACKPLANECONNECTOR+14.2V133 KHZFILTERCIRCUITRYPOWER FETSWITCHFETDRIVERPULSEWIDTHMODULATOR+14.2V133 KHZPULSEWIDTHMODULATORTRANSISTORDRIVERSCURRENTDETECTFILTERINGCIRCUITRYPOWER FETSWITCHES267 KHZFILTERCIRCUITRYFULL WAVEBRIDGERECTIFIERFETSWITCHESTRANSISTORDRIVERPULSEWIDTHMODULATORPOWER FACTOR CORRECTION /BOOST CONVERTER CIRCUITRY67 KHZDCAPPROX. 400 VDCTRANSIENT / EMIPROTECTIONCIRCUITRY÷ 2EBTS009051594JNM+ 28V BULKFigure:6-2AC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)AC Power Supply
 6-38 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 AC Power Supply  FAN FAULTDETECTFETSWITCHCOOLINGFANTHERMISTORMOUNTED ONHEATSINKSPI BUSREFREFREFREFMOD FAILAC FAIL28 RIPPLEHEATSINK DIAGVBAT DIAGBAT TEMPFAN ON+5VFAN FAIL+14.2V DIAG+5.1V DIAG+28.6V DIAGFAN CONTROLREFREFHEATSINK STATUSDETECTHI-TEMPDETECTBULK DETECTFROM STARTUPINVERTERCIRCUITRY+ 28V BULKFROM MAININVERTERCIRCUITRYFROM BATTERYCHARGER/REVERTCIRCUITRYFROMDETECTCIRCUITRYABAC ON(GREEN)MODULEFAIL(RED)3SPI BUSTO/FROMSTATIONCONTROLMODULEADDRESS DECODE CIRCUITRYFROMSTATIONCONTROLBOARD 9P/O ADDRESS BUS ENABLE ENABLEDIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRYT°A/DCONVERTERRIPPLEDETECTCIRCUITRYD/ACONVERTERPULSEWIDTHMODULATORFETDRIVERSTATIONCONTROLMODULEFAIL DETECTAPPROX. 33 V DCCHARGER OUTPUTSELECT LINES1 PPSFROM SCM SHUTDOWNFROM CLOCKGENERATORCIRCUITRYBATTERY CHARGING / REVERT CIRCUITRYC133 KHZ133 KHZFILTERCIRCUITRYPOWER FETSWITCHFILTERINGCIRCUITRYSCRAC FAILBATTERYREVERTRELAYVBAT DIAGTO DIAGNOSTICSCIRCUITRY+_STORAGEBATTERYDADDRESSDECODECIRCUITRYENABLERELAYCONTROLCIRCUITRYSPI BUS(CLOCK & DATA)SPI BUS(CLOCK & DATA)222EBTS010042594JNMFigure:6-2AC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram(Sheet 2 of 2)AC Power Supply
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 7-39 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio 7   Receiver Overview This section provides technical information for the Receiver (RX). Table 7-1 describes covered topics.  FRU Number to Kit Number Cross Reference Receiver (RX) Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) are available for the iDEN EBTS. The FRU contains the RX kit and required packaging. Table 7-2 provides a cross reference between RX FRU numbers and kit numbers.  Table 7-1   Chapter Topics Chapter Page Description 800 MHz 3X Receiver Ð CLN1283; 900 MHz 3X Receiver Ð CLN13567-40 Describes the functions and characteristics of the Receiver  (RX) module for the 800 MHz and 900 MHz single channel Base Radio (BR).1500 MHz Receiver Ð TLN3427 7-47 Describes the functions and characteristics of the Receiver  (RX) module module for the 1500 MHz single channel Base Radio (BR).800 MHz QUAD Channel Receiver Ð CLN1283; 7-51 Describes the functions and characteristics of the Receiver  (RX) module module for the 800 MHz QUAD channel Base Radio (BR).3X Receiver Functional Block Diagram 7-57 Functional Block Diagram for the Single Channel Base Radio Receiver (RX)1500 MHz Receiver Functional Block Diagram 7-58 Functional Block Diagram for the QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller (BRC)3X Receiver Functional Block Diagram 7-59 Functional Block Diagram for the QUAD Channel Base Radio Receiver (RX) Table 7-2   FRU Number to Kit Number Cross Referece Description FRU Number Kit Number 3 branch Receiver for 800 MHz Single Channel BR CLN1283 CLF14703 branch Receiver for 900 MHz Single Channel BR CLN1356 CLF1480Receiver for 1500 MHz Single Channel BR TLN3427 CRX10203 branch Receiver for 800 MHz QUAD Channel BR CLN1496 CLF1550
 7-40 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1283; 900 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1356 800 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1283;900 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1356 Overview The 3X Receiver provides the receiver functions for the Base Radio.  It consists of a receiver board, a slide-in housing, and associated hardware.  The 3X Receiver incorporates one to three diversity branches on a single module.  Figure 7-1 shows a top view of the Receiver with the cover removed. Definition and Identification The 3X receiver kit contains three receivers on a single board.  This allows a single module to provide three-branch diversity BR functionality.  To identify 3X receiver boards in the EBTS, use the MMI command  get_rx1_kit_no .  This command can be used on all receiver models, and reports the kit number from the receiverÕs EEPROM.  The 3X receiver can also be identiÞed by visual inspection of the front panel.  Because the 3X receiver can only be inserted into the middle Figure:7-1QUAD Channel Receiver (with cover removed)
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 7-41 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio 800 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1283; 900 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1356 receiver slot, the front panel of a 3X receiver reads:  INSERT ONLY IN SLOT RX2 WITH BACKPLANE 0183625X 3X RECEIVER .The two remaining receiver slots are covered with blank panels.  A summary of the Receiver FRUs available for the Base Radio is provided in the chart below. Replacement Compatibility The 3X Receiver board (CRF6010 or CRF6030) can only be used in receive slot 2 (middle receiver slot) with backplane 0183625X _ _.  The backplane connector is different than the TRF6560 version of the receiver board.  This is why there is a need for a new backplane.  The receiver will function only when it is installed in slot 2.  The TRF6560 receiver will not make electrical connection in any slot of the new backplane.  Compatibility between the new and old receiver boards is summarized in Tables 7-4 and 7-5 for 800 MHz and 900 MHz Base Radios, respectively. Table 7-3 Receiver FRUs Receiver FRUs Chassis FRUs 3X Receiver:800 MHz900 MHzCLN1283CLN1356With 3x Receiver Backplane:800 MHz900 MHzCLN1282N/ASingle Receiver:800 MHz900 MHzTLN3336N/AWith Single Receiver Backplane:800 MHz900 MHzTLN3333N/A Table 7-4 800 MHz Base Radio Receiver Board/BR Backplane Compatibility CRF6010 3X Receiver TRF6560 Receiver New backplane 0183265X-- Compatible Not compatibleOld backplane 0182416W-- Not compatible Compatible Table 7-5 900 MHz Base Radio Receiver Board/BR Backplane Compatibility CRF6030A 3X Receiver New backplane 0183265X-- CompatibleOld backplane 0182416W-- Not compatible
 7-42 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1283; 900 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1356 Diversity Configuration There is a new software parameter used for diversity purposes with the CLN1283 and CLN1356 3X Receivers.  The parameter is the  rx_fru_config  parameter.  The diversity issues to consider are described in the following paragraph.  This parameter can be accessed through the MMI commands using the Motorola password.  ROMs prior to version R06.06.17 do not support the  rx_fru_config  parameter.  The ROM version in a base repeater can be checked using the MMI command  ver .  If a repeater contains the CRF6010 or CRF6030 receiver, the BRC board must be populated with a compatible version of ROM.  Table 7-6 lists the ROM compatibilities.NOTE When replacing FRUs, ensure that the ROM version on the BRC installed in the base radio is compatible  with the ROM version on the Receiver.NOTE If downloaded code is used, then the downloaded code can be used to change the needed parameter (the  rx_fru_config  parameter). Diversity Uses and Cautions The 3X receiver board can be used in one, two, or three branch diversity systems.  The number of active receivers is determined by the  rx_fru_config  parameter stored on the Base Radio Control (BRC) board.  The  rx_fru_config  parameter is only valid, and must be set properly for, systems utilizing the CRF6010 or CRF6030 3X Receiver board.  The  rx_fru_config  parameter is ignored by Base Radios that have ROM older than version R06.06.17 installed on the Base Radio Controller board. Table 7-6 Receiver ROM Compatibility CRF6010/CRF6030 TRF6560 ROM version R06.03.40 Not compatible CompatibleROM version R06.06.09 Not compatible CompatibleROM version R06.06.17 Not compatible CompatibleROM versions newer than R06.06.17 Compatible Compatible
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 7-43 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio 800 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1283; 900 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1356 To view the  rx_fru_config  parameter, use the MMI command  get rx_fru_config .  The conÞguration of each repeater can be changed in the Þeld to match the number of receivers connected to antennas.  To change the rx_fru_conÞg parameter, use the command set  rx_fru_config yyy , where yyy is the active receiver (yyy is 1 for one branch, 12 for two branch, and 123 for three branch diversity.  For the iDEN system to work optimally, the  rx_fru_config  parameter must match the number of receivers connected to antennas.  CAUTION There will be signiÞcant system degradation if the  rx_fru_config  parameter is not properly set in systems with the CLN1283 or CLN1356 3X receiver  kit. Modifying Base Radios from Three Branch to Two Branch DiversityNOTE This procedure is applicable only to Base Radios equipped with the CRF6010 or CRF6030 3X Receiver  Board.When modifying a three branch Base Radio to a two branch Base Radio, it is important to observe all precautionary statements in the previous paragraph.  To modify a three branch Base Radio to a two branch Base Radio: 1. Disconnect the RF cable from the RX3 connector on the Base Radio. 2. Connect an SMA male load (Motorola part number 5882106P03) to the RX3 connector on the Base Radio.The SMA male load is required to limit the amount of radiated emissions.  3. Verify that the  rx_fru_config  parameter is set properly as described in the Diversity Uses and Caution paragraph above.
 7-44 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1283; 900 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1356 Modifying Base Radios from Two Branch to Three Branch Diversity 1. Remove the SMA male load from the RX3 connector of the Base Radio you wish to convert from two branch diversity to three branch diversity. 2. Connect the Receive Antenna #3 RF cable to the RX3 connector on the Base Radio. 3. Verify that the  rx_fru_config  parameter is set properly as described in the Diversity Uses and Cautions paragraph. Theory of Operation The Receiver performs highly selective bandpass Þltering and dual down conversion of the station receive RF signal.  A custom Receiver IC outputs the baseband information in a differential data format and sends it to the BRC.Table 7-7 lists the Receiver circuitry and Figure 7-4 shows a functional block diagram for the Receiver.  Frequency Synthesizer and VCO Circuitry The synthesizer and VCO circuitry generate the RF signal used to produce the 1st LO injection signal for the Þrst mixer in all the Receiver front end circuits. Functional operation of these circuits involves a Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) and VCO.The PLL IC receives frequency selection data from the BRC module microprocessor via the SPI bus.  Once programmed, the PLL IC compares a 2.1 MHz reference signal from the BRC with a feedback sample of the VCO output from its feedback buffer. Table 7-7 Receiver Circuitry  Circuit Description Frequency Synthesizer CircuitryConsists of a phase-locked loop and VCO. It generates the 1st LO injection signal for all three receivers.Receiver Front-End CircuitryProvides Þltering, ampliÞcation, and the 1st down conversion of the receive RF signal. Digital step attenuators at the 1st IF are included in this block.Custom Receiver IC CircuitryConsists of a custom IC to perform the 2nd down conversion, Þltering, ampliÞcation, and conversion of the receive signal. This block outputs the receive signal as differential data to the BRC.Address Decode,    A/D Converter, & Memory CircuitryPerforms address decoding for board and chip select signal, converts analog status signals to digital format for use by the BRC. A memory device holds module speciÞc information.Local Power Supply RegulationAccepts +14.2 Vdc input from the backplane interconnect board and generates two +10 Vdc, a +11.5 Vdc, and two +5 Vdc signals for the receiver.
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 7-45 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio 800 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1283; 900 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1356 Correction pulses are generated by the PLL IC, depending on whether the feedback signal is higher or lower in frequency than the 2.1 MHz reference.  The width of these pulses is dependent on the amount of difference between the 2.1 MHz reference and the VCO feedback.The up/down pulses are fed to a charge pump circuit that outputs a DC voltage proportional to the pulse widths.  This DC voltage is low-pass Þltered and fed to the VCO circuit as the control voltage.  The control voltage is between +2.5 Vdc and +7.5 Vdc.The DC control voltage from the synthesizer is fed to the VCO, which generates the RF signal used to produce the 1st LO injection signal.  The VCO responds to the DC control voltage by generating the appropriate RF signal.  This signal is fed through a buffer to the 1st LO injection ampliÞer.  A sample of this signal is returned to the PLL IC through a buffer to close the VCO feedback loop. Receiver Front End Circuitry The station receive RF signal enters the Receiver through the RF-type connector located on the back of the Receiver board.  This signal is low-pass Þltered and ampliÞed.  The ampliÞed output is image Þltered before being input to the 1st mixer.  The signal mixes with the 1st LO injection signal to produce a 73.35 MHz 1st IF signal.The 1st IF signal is sent through a 4-pole bandpass Þlter and fed to a buffer ampliÞer.  The buffer ampliÞer output signal is 4-pole bandpass Þltered again and the resultant signal is then passed through a digital attenuator.  This attenuation is determined by the BRC.  The resulting signal is then fed to the RF input of the custom receive IC. Custom Receiver IC Circuitry The custom Receiver IC provides additional ampliÞcation, Þltering, and a second down-conversion.  The 2nd IF signal is converted to a digital signal and is output via differential driver circuitry to the BRC.  This data signal contains the necessary I and Q information, AGC information, and other data transfer information required by the BRC to process the receive signal.The remainder of the custom Receiver IC circuitry consists of timing and tank circuits to support the internal oscillator, 2nd LO synthesizer circuitry, and 2nd IF circuitry.A serial bus provides data communications between the custom Receiver IC and the DSP Glue ASIC (DGA) located on the BRC.  This bus enables the DGA to control various current and gain settings, establish the data bus clock rate, program the 2nd LO, and perform other control functions.
 7-46 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1283; 900 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1356 Address Decode Circuitry The address decode circuitry enables the BRC to use the SPI bus to select a speciÞc device on a speciÞc Receiver for control or data communication purposes.  If the board select circuitry decodes address lines A2 through A5 as the Receiver address, it enables the chip select circuitry.  The chip select circuitry then decodes address lines A0 and A1 to generate the chip select signals for the EEPROM, A/D converter, and PLL IC. Memory Circuitry The memory circuitry consists of three EEPROMs located on the Receiver.  The BRC performs all memory read and write operations via the SPI bus.  Information stored in this memory device includes the kit number, revision number, module speciÞc scaling and correction factors, and free form module information (scratch pad). A/D Converter Circuitry Analog signals from various strategic operating points throughout the Receiver board are fed to the A/D converter.  These analog signals are converted to a digital signal and are output to the BRC via the SPI lines upon request of the BRC. Voltage Regulator Circuitry The voltage regulator circuitry consists of two +10 Vdc, a +10.8 Vdc, and two +5 Vdc regulators.  The two +10 Vdc and the +10.8 Vdc regulators accept the +14.2 Vdc input from the backplane interconnect board and generate the operating voltages for the Receiver circuitry.The +10 Vdc regulators each feed a +5 Vdc regulator, one of which outputs Analog +5 Vdc, and the other Digital +5 Vdc operating voltages for use by the custom Receiver IC. A +5.1 Vdc operating voltage is also available from the backplane interconnect board to supply +5.1 Vdc to the remainder of the Receiver circuitry.
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 7-47 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio 1500 MHz Receiver – TLN3427 1500 MHz Receiver – TLN3427 Overview The Receiver module provides the receiver functions for the Repeater. It consists of a receiver board, a slide-in module housing, and associated hardware.The receiver module assembly interconnects with the backplane through a 96-pin connector and a blindmate RF connector. Two captive panel fasteners located on the front of the module hold it in the chassis.Figure 7-2 shows a top view of the Receiver module with the module cover removed. Theory of Operation The Receiver module performs highly selective bandpass Þltering and dual down-conversion of the station receive RF signal. A custom receiver IC outputs the baseband information in a differential data format and sends it to the Base Radio Controller module (BRC).Table 7-8 lists and describes the Receiver circuitry and Figure 7-5 shows the functional block diagram.1.5GHZ-B853Figure:7-2Receiver (with top removed)
 7-48 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 1500 MHz Receiver – TLN3427 Frequency Synthesizer and VCO Circuitry The synthesizer and VCO circuitry generate the RF signal used to produce the 1st LO injection signal for the 1st mixer in the receiver front end circuitry. Functional operation of these circuits involves a Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) and VCO. Phase-Locked Loop The PLL IC   receives frequency selection data from the BRC module microprocessor via the SPI bus. Once programmed, the PLL IC compares a 2.1 MHz reference signal from the BRC with a feedback sample of the VCO output from its feedback buffer.Correction pulses are generated by the PLL IC, depending on whether the feedback signal is higher or lower in frequency than the 2.1 MHz reference. The width of these pulses is dependent on the amount of difference between the 2.1 MHz reference and the VCO feedback.The up/down pulses are fed to a charge pump circuit that outputs a dc voltage proportional to the pulse widths. This dc voltage is low-pass Þltered and fed to the VCO circuit as the control voltage. The control voltage is between +2.5 Vdc and +7.5 Vdc. VCO The dc control voltage from the synthesizer is fed to the VCO, which generates the RF signal used to produce the 1st LO injection signal. The VCO responds to the dc control voltage by generating the appropriate RF signal. A sample of this signal is returned to the PLL IC through a buffer to close the VCO feedback loop. Most of this signal is fed through a buffer to the doubler . Table 7-8 Receiver Circuitry and Functions Receiver Circuit This Circuit . . . Frequency Synthesizer Circuitryconsists of a phase-locked loop and VCO. It generates the 1st LO injection signal.Receiver Front-End Circuitryprovides Þltering, ampliÞcation, and the 1st down-conversion of the receive RF signal. Digital step attenuators at the 1st IF are included in this block.Custom Receiver IC Circuitryconsists of a custom IC to perform the 2nd down-conversion, Þltering, ampliÞcation, and conversion of the receive signal. This block outputs the receive signal as differential data to the BRC module.Address Decode,    A/D Converter, & Memory Circuitryperforms address decoding for board and chip select signal, converts analog status signals to digital format for use by the BRC module. A memory device holds module speciÞc information.Local Power Supply Regulationaccepts +14.2 Vdc input from the backplane interconnect board and generates two +10 Vdc signals and two +5 Vdc signals for the receiver module.
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 7-49 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio 1500 MHz Receiver – TLN3427 The frequency doubler is used to double the frequency of the RF signal from the VCO to produce the 1st LO injection signal. This frequency-doubled signal is sent to the injection ampliÞer to provide the 1st LO injection signal to the mixer in the receiver front end circuitry. Receiver Front End Circuitry The station receive RF signal enters the receiver module through the RF-type connector located on the receiver board. This signal is low-pass Þltered. It is then sent to the preselector, and ampliÞed. The ampliÞed output is image Þltered  before being input to the 1st mixer. The signal mixes with the 1st LO injection signal to produce a 73.35 MHz 1st IF signal.The 1st IF signal is sent through a 4-pole bandpass Þlter and fed to a buffer ampliÞer. The signal is 4-pole bandpass Þltered again. The resultant signal passes through a digital attenuator. This attenuation is determined by the BRC module. The signal is then fed to the RF input of the custom receive IC. Custom Receiver IC Circuitry The custom receiver IC provides additional ampliÞcation, Þltering, and a second down-conversion. The 2nd IF signal is converted to a digital signal and is output via differential driver circuitry to the BRC. This data signal contains the necessary I and Q information, AGC information, and other data transfer information required by the BRC to process the receive signal.The remainder of the custom receiver IC circuitry consists of timing and tank circuits to support the internal oscillator, 2nd LO synthesizer circuitry, and 2nd IF circuitry.A serial bus provides data communications between the custom receiver IC and the DSP Glue ASIC (DGA) located on the BRC. This bus enables the DGA to control various current and gain settings, establish the data bus clock rate, program the 2nd LO, and perform other control functions. Address Decode, Memory, and A/D Converter Circuitry The Address Decode, Memory and A/D Converter circuitry performs address decoding for board and chip select signals, converts analog status signals to digital format, and the memory holds module speciÞc information. Address Decode Circuitry The address decode circuitry enables the BRC module to use the address bus. The BRC can select a speciÞc device on a speciÞc station module via the SPI bus for control or data communication purposes. If the board select circuitry decodes address lines A2 through A5 as the receiver module address, it enables the chip select circuitry. The chip select circuitry then decodes address lines A0 and A1 to generate the chip select signals for the EEPROM, A/D converter, and PLL IC.
 7-50 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 1500 MHz Receiver – TLN3427 Memory Circuitry The memory circuitry consists of an EEPROM located on the receiver module. The BRC module performs all memory read and write operations via the SPI bus. Information stored in this memory device includes the kit number, revision number, module speciÞc scaling and correction factors, and free form module information (scratch pad). A/D Converter Circuitry Analog signals from various strategic operating points throughout the receiver board are fed to the A/D converter. These analog signals are converted to a digital signal and are output to the BRC via the SPI lines upon request of the BRC module. Voltage Regulator Circuitry The voltage regulator circuitry consists of two +10 Vdc and two +5 Vdc regulators. The +10 Vdc regulators accept the +14.2 Vdc input from the backplane interconnect board. Both regulators generate a +10 Vdc operating voltage for the receiver board circuitry.One of the +10 Vdc regulators feed two +5 Vdc regulators, which outputs an Analog +5 Vdc and Digital +5 Vdc operating voltages for use by the custom receiver IC. A +5.1 Vdc operating voltage is also available from the backplane interconnect board to supply +5.1 Vdc to the remainder of the receiver board circuitry.
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 7-51 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio 800 MHz QUAD Channel Receiver – CLN1283; 800 MHz QUAD Channel Receiver – CLN1283; Overview The QUAD receiver provides receiver functions for the QUAD Channel Base Radio.  The QUAD receiver consists of a receiver board, a slide-in housing, and associated hardware.  A a single module of the QUAD receiver incorporates one to three diversity branches.  Figure 7-3 shows a top view of the Receiver with the cover removed. Diversity Uses and Cautions The 3X receiver board can be used in one, two, or three-branch diversity systems.  The  rx_fru_config  parameter determines the number of active receivers.  To view the  rx_fru_config  parameter, use the MMI command.  (See software commands.)   Each repeaterÕs conÞguration can be changed in the Þeld to match the number of receivers connected to antennas.  To change the rx_fru_conÞg Figure:7-33X Receiver (with cover removed)THIS PICTURE MUST BE CHANGED!
7-52 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio EBTS System Manual - Vol 2800 MHz QUAD Channel Receiver – CLN1283;parameter, use the command (reference software commands). In this command,  yyy is the active receiver. (Note: yyy is 1 for one branch, 12 for two branch, and 123 for three branch diversity.)  For the iDEN system to work optimally, the rx_fru_config parameter must match the number of receivers connected to antennas.  CAUTIONImproperly setting the rx_fru_config parameter will cause serious system degradation.Modifying Base Radios from Three Branch to Two Branch DiversityWhen modifying a three-branch Base Radio to a two-branch Base Radio, observing all precautionary statements in the previous paragraph is important.  To modify a three-branch Base Radio to a two-branch Base Radio:1. Disconnect the RF cable from the RX3 connector on the Base Radio.2. Connect an SMA male load (Motorola part number 5882106P03) to the RX3 connector on the Base Radio.The SMA male load is required to limit the amount of radiated emissions. 3. Verify that the rx_fru_config parameter is set properly, according to the Diversity Uses and Caution paragraph above.
68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 7-53EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio800 MHz QUAD Channel Receiver – CLN1283;Modifying Base Radios from Two Branch to Three Branch Diversity1. Remove the SMA male load from the RX3 connector of the Base Radio that you wish to convert from two-branch diversity to three-branch diversity.2. Connect the Receive Antenna #3 RF cable to the RX3 connector on the Base Radio.3. Verify that the rx_fru_config parameter is set properly, according to the Diversity Uses and Cautions paragraph.Theory of OperationThe Receiver performs highly selective bandpass Þltering and dual down conversion of the station receive RF signal.  A custom Receiver IC outputs the baseband information in a differential data format and sends it to the BRC.Table 7-7 lists the Receiver circuitry. Figure 7-6 shows a functional block diagram for the Receiver. Frequency Synthesizer and VCO CircuitryThe synthesizer and VCO circuitry generate the RF signal used to produce the 1st LO injection signal for the Þrst mixer in all the Receiver front end circuits. Functional operation of these circuits involves a Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) and VCO.The PLL IC receives frequency selection data from the BRC module microprocessor via the SPI bus.  Once programmed, the PLL IC compares a 2.1 MHz reference signal from the BRC with a feedback sample of the VCO output from its feedback buffer.Table 7-9Receiver Circuitry Circuit DescriptionFrequency Synthesizer CircuitryConsists of a phase-locked loop and VCO. It generates the 1st LO injection signal for all three receivers.Receiver Front-End CircuitryProvides Þltering, ampliÞcation, and the 1st down conversion of the receive RF signal. This block includes digital step attenuators at the 1st IF.Custom Receiver IC CircuitryConsists of a custom IC to perform the 2nd down conversion, Þltering, ampliÞcation, and conversion of the receive signal. This block outputs the receive signal as differential data to the BRC.Address Decode,    A/D Converter, & Memory CircuitryPerforms address decoding for board and chip-select signals. Converts analog status signals to digital format for use by the BRC. A memory device holds module-speciÞc information.Local Power Supply RegulationAccepts +14.2 Vdc input from the backplane interconnect board. Also  generates two +10 Vdc, a +11.5 Vdc, and two +5 Vdc signals for the receiver.
7-54 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio EBTS System Manual - Vol 2800 MHz QUAD Channel Receiver – CLN1283;The PLL ICC generates correction pulses, depending on whether the feedback signal is higher or lower in frequency than the 2.1 MHz reference.  The width of these pulses depends on the amount of difference between the 2.1 MHz reference and the VCO feedback.The up/down pulses enter a charge pump circuit. The charge pump outputs a DC voltage proportional to the pulse widths.  After low-pass Þltering, this DC voltage enters the VCO circuit as the control voltage.  The control voltage measures between +2.5 Vdc and +7.5 Vdc.The DC control voltage from the synthesizer is enters the VCO. The VCO generates the RF signal that the circuit uses to produce the 1st LO injection signal.  The VCO responds to the DC control voltage by generating the appropriate RF signal.  This signal passes through a buffer to the 1st LO injection ampliÞer.  A sample of this signal returns to the PLL IC through a buffer to close the VCO feedback loop.Receiver Front End CircuitryThe station receive RF signal enters the Receiver through the RF-type connector  on the back of the Receiver board.  The circuit low-pass Þlters and ampliÞes this signal.  The ampliÞed output passes through an image Þlters before entering the 1st mixer.  The signal mixes with the 1st LO injection signal to produce a 73.35 MHz 1st IF signal.The 1st IF signal passes through a four-pole, bandpass Þlter and enters a buffer ampliÞer.  The buffer ampliÞer output signal again undergoes four-pole, bandpass Þltering. The resultant signal then passes through a digital attenuator.  The BRC determines the amount of  attenuation.  The resulting signal then enters  the RF input of the custom Receiver IC.Custom Receiver IC CircuitryThe custom Receiver IC provides additional ampliÞcation, Þltering, and a second down-conversion.  The IC converts the 2nd IF signal to a digital signal. The digital signal exits the receiver IC via differential driver circuitry, and passes to the BRC.  This data signal contains I and Q information, AGC information, and other data transfer information. The BRC uses this information to facilitate processing of the receive signal.The remainder of the custom Receiver IC circuitry consists of timing and tank circuits. These circuits support the internal oscillator, 2nd LO synthesizer, and 2nd IF circuitry.A serial bus provides data communications between the custom Receiver IC and the DSP Glue ASIC (DGA). These circuits are on the BRC.  The serial bus enables the DGA to perform several control functions...❐control various current and gain settings❐establish the data bus clock rate❐program the 2nd LO❐perform other control functions
68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 7-55EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio800 MHz QUAD Channel Receiver – CLN1283;Address Decode CircuitryAddress decode circuitry enables the BRC to use the SPI bus to select a speciÞc device on a speciÞc Receiver for control or data communication purposes.  If board-select circuitry decodes address lines A2 through A5 as the Receiver address, it enables the chip select circuitry.  The chip select circuitry then decodes address lines A0 and A1. The decoding process generates the chip select signals for the EEPROM, A/D converter, and PLL IC.Memory CircuitryThe memory circuitry consists of three EEPROMs located on the Receiver.  The BRC performs memory read and write operations via the SPI bus.  Information stored in this memory device includes...❐the kit number❐revision number❐module speciÞc scaling and correction factors❐free form module information (scratch pad)A/D Converter CircuitryAnalog signals from various strategic operating points throughout the Receiver board pass through the A/D converter.  These analog signals become a digital signal. Upon request of the BRC,  this signal travels to the BRC via the SPI lines.Voltage Regulator CircuitryThe voltage regulator circuitry consists of two +10 Vdc, a +10.8 Vdc, and two +5 Vdc regulators.  The two +10 Vdc and the +10.8 Vdc regulators accept the +14.2 Vdc input from the backplane interconnect board. These regulators produce operating voltages for the Receiver circuitry.The +10 Vdc regulators each feed a +5 Vdc regulator. One of these regulators outputs Analog +5 Vdc. The other regulator outputs Digital +5 Vdc operating voltages for use by the custom Receiver IC. The backplane interconnect board also produces a +5.1 Vdc operating voltage. This voltage powers the remainder of the Receiver circuitry.
7-56 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio EBTS System Manual - Vol 2This Page IntentionallyLeft Blank
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 7-57 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Receiver 7   RECEIVER #3 FRONT END CIRCUITRYRECEIVER #2 FRONT END CIRCUITRYRECEIVE RFFROM RX ANTENNA(MULTICOUPLER)SMA-TYPECONNECTOR2.1 MHZ REFFROM CONTROLMODULESPI BUSTO/FROM CONTROLMODULEADDRESS BUSFROM CONTROLMODULEDIFFERENTIALDATATO CONTROLMODULESERIAL BUSTO/FROM CONTROLMODULEADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY, & A/DCONVERTER CIRCUITRYCHIP SELECTDECODE CIRCUITRYRECEIVER SELECTDECODE CIRCUITRYMEMORY #1SYNTHESIZERCIRCUITRYCHARGEPUMPPHASELOCKEDLOOPIC+10 VREGULATORREGULATORYCIRCUITRYVCOCIRCUITRY+10 VAGCFROM CONTROLMODULELO-PASSFILTER HI-PASSFILTER PREAMPLIFIERCIRCUITRYRECEIVER #1 FRONT END CIRCUITRY2ND LOVCO14.4 MHZTIMINGCIRCUITRY450 KHZFILTERCIRCUITRYDRIVERCIRCUITRYCUSTOM RECEIVERIC CIRCUITRY(ABACUS #1 )DIGITALATTENUATORCIRCUITRY73.35 MHZ1ST IFCUSTOMRECEIVERICVCOFEEDBACKBUFFERBUFFERSUPERFILTEROSCILLATORBUFFERAMPLO-PASSLOOPFILTERCONTROLVOLTAGE(+2.5 TO +7.5 VDC)VCO FEEDBACK2.1 MHZ REFERENCECHIPSELECTCHIPSELECTSECOND+10 VSOURCE+14.2 VFROMBACKPLANE+10 VREGULATOR+5 VREGULATOR+5 VREGULATORDIGITAL+5 VSOURCE+10 VSOURCEANALOG+5 VSOURCECHIPSELECTFINRINVCOFEEDBACKSPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA)VARIOUSSIGNALSTO MONITOR2.1 MHZ REF4-POLEBANDPASSFILTER4-POLEBANDPASSFILTER1STMIXEREBTS293120597JNMVCOMEMORY #2MEMORY #3#3 A/DCONVERTER#2 A/DCONVERTER#1 A/DCONVERTER+10 VREGULATORINJECTIONAMPLIFIERTO RECEIVER #2 MIXERTO RECEIVER #3 MIXERABACUS #2ABACUS #33 WAYSPLITTER(NOTE)NOTE: 14.4 MHz TIMING CIRCUITRY AND 2ND LO VCO PRESENT ONLY ON ABACUS #2.FUNCTIONS ARE SHARED FOR ALL THREE ABACUS SECTIONS.Figure:7-43X Receiver Functional Block Diagram3X ReceiverFunctional Block Diagram
 7-58 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Receiver 7ReceiverFunctional Block DiagramModel TLN3427RECEIVE RFFROM RX ANTENNA(MULTICOUPLER)2.1 MHZ REFFROM BRCMODULESPI BUSTO/FROM BRCMODULEADDRESS BUSFROM BRCMODULEDIFFERENTIALDATA (DSP BUS)TO BRCMODULESERIAL BUSTO/FROM BRCMODULEADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY, & A/DCONVERTER CIRCUITRYCHIP SELECTDECODE CIRCUITRY(U2804)BOARD SELECTDECODE CIRCUITRY(U2804)EEPROMMEMORY(U2601)SYNTHESIZERCIRCUITRYPHASELOCKEDLOOP IC(U2401)+10 VREGULATOR(U2702)REGULATORYCIRCUITRYVCOCIRCUITRY+10 VAGCFROM BRCMODULELOW-PASSFILTER(L2000, C2000,C2001, C2002)PRESELECTORFILTER(FL2000)PREAMPLIFIERCIRCUITRY(Q2030, Q2031)IMAGEFILTERCIRCUITRY(FL2070)RECEIVER FRONT END CIRCUITRY2ND LOTANKCIRCUITRY14.4 MHZTIMINGCIRCUITRY450 KHZFILTERCIRCUITRYDRIVERCIRCUITRY(U2501)CUSTOMRECEIVER ICCIRCUITRYDIGITALATTENUATORCIRCUITRY(U2100)73.35 MHZ1ST IFCUSTOMRECEIVER IC(U2500)VCOFEEDBACKBUFFER(Q2401)SUPERFILTER(Q2280)OSCILLATOR(U2200)LOW-PASSLOOPFILTER(U2403)CONTROLVOLTAGE(+2.5 TO +7.5 VDC)VCO FEEDBACK2.1 MHZ REFERENCE1ST LOINJ AMPCIRCUITRY(Q2302, Q2303,FL2300)CHIP SELECTSECOND+10 VSOURCE+14.2 VFROMBACKPLANE+10 VREGULATOR(U2703)+5 VREGULATOR(U2700)+5 VREGULATOR(U2701)DIGITAL+5 VSOURCE+10 VSOURCEANALOG+5 VSOURCECHIPSELECTFINRINVCOFEEDBACKSPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA)VARIOUSSIGNALSTO MONITORA/DCONVERTER(U2600)2.1 MHZ REF4-POLEBANDPASSFILTER(Y2100)4-POLEBANDPASSFILTER(Y2101)1STMIXER(CR2070)BUFFERAMP(Q2100)LINEDRIVER(U2805)DOUBLER(Q2301)REFERENCEBUFFER(Q2402)CHARGE PUMP(Q2405, Q2406,Q2407, Q2408,Q2409)CHIP SELECTBUFFERAMP(Q2300)Figure:7-51500 MHz Receiver Functional Block Diagram
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 7-59 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Receiver 7RECEIVER #3 FRONT END CIRCUITRYRECEIVER #2 FRONT END CIRCUITRYRECEIVE RFFROM RX ANTENNA(MULTICOUPLER)SMA-TYPECONNECTOR2.1 MHZ REFFROM CONTROLMODULESPI BUSTO/FROM CONTROLMODULEADDRESS BUSFROM CONTROLMODULEDIFFERENTIALDATATO CONTROLMODULESERIAL BUSTO/FROM CONTROLMODULEADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY, & A/DCONVERTER CIRCUITRYCHIP SELECTDECODE CIRCUITRYRECEIVER SELECTDECODE CIRCUITRYMEMORY #1SYNTHESIZERCIRCUITRYCHARGEPUMPPHASELOCKEDLOOPIC+10 VREGULATORREGULATORYCIRCUITRYVCOCIRCUITRY+10 VAGCFROM CONTROLMODULELO-PASSFILTER HI-PASSFILTER PREAMPLIFIERCIRCUITRYRECEIVER #1 FRONT END CIRCUITRY2ND LOVCO14.4 MHZTIMINGCIRCUITRY450 KHZFILTERCIRCUITRYDRIVERCIRCUITRYCUSTOM RECEIVERIC CIRCUITRY(ABACUS #1 )DIGITALATTENUATORCIRCUITRY73.35 MHZ1ST IFCUSTOMRECEIVERICVCOFEEDBACKBUFFERBUFFERSUPERFILTEROSCILLATORBUFFERAMPLO-PASSLOOPFILTERCONTROLVOLTAGE(+2.5 TO +7.5 VDC)VCO FEEDBACK2.1 MHZ REFERENCECHIPSELECTCHIPSELECTSECOND+10 VSOURCE+14.2 VFROMBACKPLANE+10 VREGULATOR+5 VREGULATOR+5 VREGULATORDIGITAL+5 VSOURCE+10 VSOURCEANALOG+5 VSOURCECHIPSELECTFINRINVCOFEEDBACKSPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA)VARIOUSSIGNALSTO MONITOR2.1 MHZ REF4-POLEBANDPASSFILTER4-POLEBANDPASSFILTER1STMIXEREBTS293120597JNMVCOMEMORY #2MEMORY #3#3 A/DCONVERTER#2 A/DCONVERTER#1 A/DCONVERTER+10 VREGULATORINJECTIONAMPLIFIERTO RECEIVER #2 MIXERTO RECEIVER #3 MIXERABACUS #2ABACUS #33 WAYSPLITTER(NOTE)NOTE: 14.4 MHz TIMING CIRCUITRY AND 2ND LO VCO PRESENT ONLY ON ABACUS #2.FUNCTIONS ARE SHARED FOR ALL THREE ABACUS SECTIONS.Figure:7-63X Receiver Functional Block DiagramQUAD ReceiverFunctional Block DiagramTHIS PICTURE MUST BE CHANGED!
 7-60 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Receiver This Page IntentionallyLeft Blank
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-1 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios 8   TroubleshootingSingle Channel Base Radios Overview This chapter isolates single channel Base Radio failures to the FRU level.  The chapter contains procedures for:chapter contains procedures for: ❐ Troubleshooting ❐ VeriÞcation ❐ Station OperationThe Base Radio maintenance philosophy is repair by replacing defective FRUs with new FRUs.  This maintenance method limits down-time, and quickly restores the Base Radio to normal operation. Two Base Radio troubleshooting procedures appear here.  Each procedure quickly identifies faulty FRUs. Ship defective FRUs to a Motorola repair depot for repair. Recommended Test Equipment Table 8-1 lists recommended test equipment for performing Base Radio troubleshooting and veriÞcation procedures.
 8-2 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Table 8-1 Recommended Test Equipment Test Equipment Model Number Use Communications Analyzer R2660 w/iDEN option Used for checking receive and transmit operation (iDEN signaling capability) and station alignmentDummy Load (50  Ω , 150 W ) none Used to terminate outputService Computer IBM or clone, 80286 or betterLocal service terminalPortable Rubidium Frequency StandardBall Efratom Frequency standard for R2660, netting TFRPower Meter none Used to measure reßected and forward powerRF Attenuator, 250 W, 10 dB Motorola 0180301E72 Protection for R2660Software:CommunicationFile CompressionProcomm PlusPKZipLocal service computerCompress/Decompress data
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-3 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Troubleshooting Procedures Many of the troubleshooting and station operation procedures require Man-Machine Interface (MMI) commands.  These commands are used to communicate station level commands to the Base Radio via the RS-232 communications port located on the front of the BRC.  Routine Checkout Procedure 1 is a quick, non-intrusive test performed during a routine site visit.  Use this procedure to verify proper station operation without taking the station out of service.  Figure 8-1 shows the Procedure 1 Troubleshooting Flowchart.Figure:8-1Procedure 1 Troubleshooting Flowchart PROCEDURE 1 ROUTINESITE VISITOBSERVE LEDINDICATORSModule Suspected  of Being Faulty?NoNoDONECHECK CURRENTALARM STATUSUse MMI commandget alarmsto check alarm statusModule Suspected  of Being Faulty?Ye s  Go to TroubleshootingProcedure 2 Flow ChartYe s  Go to TroubleshootingProcedure 2 Flow ChartRefer toControls and Indicatorsfor LED DefinitionsEBTS021071895JNM
 8-4 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Reported/Suspected Problem Use Procedure 2 to troubleshoot reported or suspected equipment malfunctions. Perform this procedure with equipment in service (non-intrusive) and with equipment taken temporarily out of service (intrusive).Figure 8-2 shows the Procedure 2 Troubleshooting Flowchart.Figure:8-2Procedure 2 Troubleshooting FlowchartPROCEDURE 2PROBLEMREPORTED OR SUSPECTEDDONEClear Problem ReportOBSERVE LEDINDICATORSModule Suspected  of Being Faulty?Ye s  Go to Module ReplacementProcedures SectionNoCHECK CURRENTALARM STATUSUse MMI commandget alarmsto check alarm statusModule Suspected  of Being Faulty?  Go to Module ReplacementProcedures SectionPERFORMVERIFICATION TESTSUse MMI commands toperform tests as specified instation verification procedure.Module Suspected  of Being Faulty?  Go to Module ReplacementProcedures SectionYe sNoYe sNoRefer toControls and Indicatorsfor LED DefinitionsEBTS022071895JNM
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-5 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures Replace suspected station modules with known non-defective modules to restore the station to proper operation.  The following procedures provide FRU replacement instructions and post-replacement adjustments and/or veriÞcation instructions. Base Radio Replacement ProcedureNOTE The Base Radio removal and installation procedures are included for reference or buildout purposes.  Field maintenance of Base Radios typically consists of replacement of FRUs within the Base Radio.  Perform Base Radio FRU replacement in accordance with ÒBase  Radio FRU Replacement ProcedureÓ below.Perform Base Radio (BR) replacement as described in the following paragraphs. Removal Remove BR from Equipment Cabinet as follows: 1. Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply ON/OFF switch to the OFF position. 2. Tag and disconnect the cabling from the BR rear panel connectors. 3. Remove the four M6 TORX screws which secure the BR front panel to the Equipment Cabinet mounting rails.WARNING! BR WEIGHT EXCEEDS 60 LBS (27 KG).  USE TWO-PERSON LIFT WHEN REMOVING OR INSTALLING BR FROM EQUIPMENT CABINET.  MAKE CERTAIN BR IS FULLY SUPPORTED WHEN BR IS FREE FROM  MOUNTING RAILS. 4. While supporting the BR, carefully remove the BR from the Equipment Cabinet by sliding the BR from the front of cabinet.
 8-6 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures Installation Install BR in Equipment Cabinet as follows: 1. If adding a BR, install side rails in the appropriate BR mounting position in the rack. 2. While supporting the BR, carefully lift and slide the BR in the Equipment Cabinet mounting position. 3. Secure the BR to the Equipment Cabinet mounting rails using four M6 TORX screws.  Tighten the screws to 40 in-lb (4.5 Nm). 4. Connect the cabling to the BR rear panel connectors as tagged during the BR removal.  If adding a BR, perform the required cabling in accordance with the Cabling Information subsection of the RFDS section applicable to the system. 5. Perform BR activation in accordance with Station VeriÞcation Procedures below. Anti-Static PrecautionsCAUTION The Base Radio contains static-sensitive devices.    when replacing Base Radio FRUs, always wear a grounded wrist strap and observe proper anti-static procedures to prevent electrostatic discharge damage  to Base Radio modules. Motorola publication 68P81106E84 provides complete static protection information.  This publication is available through Motorola National Parts. Observe the following additional precautions: ❐ Wear a wrist strap (Motorola Part No. 4280385A59 or equivalent) at all times when servicing the Base Radio to minimize static build-up. ❐ A grounding clip is provided with each EBTS cabinet.  If not available, use another appropriate grounding point. ❐ DO NOT insert or remove modules with power applied to the Base Radio.  ALWAYS turn the power OFF using the Power Supply rocker switch on the front of the Power Supply module. ❐ Keep spare modules in factory packaging for transporting.  When shipping modules, always pack in original packaging. FRU Replacement Procedure  Perform the following steps to replace any of the Base Radio FRUs:
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-7 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement ProceduresNOTE When servicing Base Radios (BRs), in situations where the Control Board or the entire BR is replaced, the integrated Site Controller (iSC) will automatically reboot the serviced BR given that the BR has been off-line for a period not less than that stipulated by the ÒReplacement BRC Accept TimerÓ (default is 3 minutes).  If the BR is turned on prior to the expiration of the ÒReplacement BRC Accept TimerÓ, power the BR back down and wait the minimum timer length  before turning the BR back on. 1. Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker switch (located behind the front panel of the Power Supply) to the OFF (0) position. 2. Loosen the front panel fasteners.  These are located on each side of the module being replaced. 3. Pull out the module. 4. Insert the non-defective replacement module by aligning the module side rails with the appropriate rail guides inside the Base Radio chassis.   5. Gently push the replacement module completely into the Base Radio chassis assembly using the module handle(s). CAUTION DO NOT slam or force the module into the chassis assembly.  This will damage the connectors  or backplane. 6. Secure the replacement module by tightening the front panel fasteners to the speciÞed torque of 5 in-lbs. 7. Apply power to the Base Radio by setting the switch to the ON position. 8. Perform the Station VeriÞcation Procedure provided below.
 8-8 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures Power Amplifier (PA) Fan FRU Replacement Perform the following steps to replace the Power AmpliÞer (PA) fans. 1. Remove the Power AmpliÞer from the Base Radio per FRU Replacement Procedure. 2. Disconnect fan power cable from PA housing. 3. Remove front panel from fan assembly. 4. Remove fan assembly from PA chassis.  NOTE Reverse above procedure to install new fan kit.
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-9 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Station Verification Procedures Station Verification Procedures Perform the Station VeriÞcation Procedures whenever you replace a FRU.  The procedures verify transmit and receive operations.  Each procedure also contains the equipment set-up. Replacement FRU Verification All module speciÞc information is programmed in the factory prior to shipment.  Base Radio speciÞc information (e.g., receive and transmit frequencies) is downloaded to the Base Radio from the network/site controller.Replacement FRU alignment is not required for the Base Radio.  Base Repeater FRU Hardware Revision VerificationNOTE The following procedure requires the Base Radio to be out of service.  Unless the Base Radio is currently out of service, Motorola recommends performing this procedure during off-peak hours.  This minimizes or  eliminates disruption of service to system users. 1. Connect one end of the RS-232 cable to the service computer. 2. Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to the STATUS port, located on the front panel of the BRC. 3. Using the Þeld password, login to the BR.
 8-10 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Station Verification Procedures 4. Collect revision numbers from the station by typing the following commands: 5. If all modules return revision numbers of the format ÒRxx.xx.xxÓ, then all revision numbers are present and no further action is required.  Log out and repeat steps 1 through  4 for each additional BR.If revision numbers were returned as blank or not in the format ÒRxx.xx.xxÓ, contact your local Motorola representative or Technical Support. 6. When all BRs have been checked, log out. Transmitter Verification The transmitter veriÞcation procedure veriÞes the transmitter operation and the integrity of the transmit path.  This veriÞcation procedure is recommended after replacing an Exciter, Power AmpliÞer, BRC, or Power Supply module.NOTE The following procedure requires the Base Radio to be out of service.  Unless the Base Radio is currently out of service, Motorola recommends performing this procedure during off-peak hours.  This minimizes or  eliminates disruption of service to system users. Equipment Setup To set up the equipment, use the following procedure: 1. Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker switch (located behind the front panel of the Power Supply) to the OFF (0) position. 2. Connect one end of the RS-232 cable to the service computer.BRC>dekeyBRC>test_modeBRC>get brc_rev_noBRC>get rx1_rev_noBRC>get rx2_rev_noBRC>get rx3_rev_no (if BR is 3 branch)BRC>get pa_rev_noBRC>get ex_rev_noBRC>
 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-11 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Station Verification Procedures 3. Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to the STATUS port located on the front panel of the BRC.  4. Disconnect the existing cable from the connector labeled PA OUT.This connector is located on the backplane of the Base Radio. 5. Connect a test cable to the PA OUT connector. 6. Connect a 10 dB attenuator on the other end of the test cable. 7. From the attenuator, connect a cable to the RF IN/OUT connector on the R2660 Communications Analyzer. 8. Remove power from the R2660 and connect the Rubidium Frequency Standard 10MHZ OUTPUT to a 10 dB attenuator. 9. Connect the other end of the 10 dB attenuator to the 10MHZ REFERENCE OSCILLATOR IN/OUT connector on the R2660.NOTE Refer to the equipment manual provided with the R2660 for further information regarding mode conÞguration of the unit (Motorola Part  No. 68P80386B72).  10. Set the R2660 to the EXT REF   mode. 11. Apply power to the R2660. 12. Set the R2660 to the SPECTRUM ANALYZER mode with the center frequency set to the transmit frequency of the Base Radio under test.13. Perform the appropriate transmitter veriÞcation procedure below for the particular Power AmpliÞer used in the Base Radio.Transmitter Verification Procedure(40W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier – TLF2020)  This procedure provides commands and responses to verify proper operation of the transmit path for 800 MHz Base Radios using a 40 Watt Power AmpliÞer.
8-12 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Station Verification Procedures1. Apply power to the Base Radio by setting the switch to the 1 position. The following message displays on the service computer during power-up.2. Enter the proper password.  After entering the correct password, the BRC> prompt is displayed on the service computer. The default password is motorolaNOTEMotorola recommends that you change the default password once proper operation of the equipment is veriÞed.3. At the BRC> prompt, type:   dekey This command veriÞes that there is no RF power being transmitted.CAUTIONThe following command keys the transmitter.  Make sure that transmission only occurs on licensed frequencies or into a RF load. Base Radiofirmware revision RXX.XX.XXCopyright  1998Motorola, Inc.  All rights reserved.Unauthorized access prohibitedEnter login password:BRC> dekeyXMIT OFF INITIATED
68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-13EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosStation Verification Procedures4. At the BRC> prompt, type: set tx_power 40This command sets the transmitter output to 40 Watts. After keying the Base Radio, verify the forward and reßected powers of the station along with the station VSWR with the parameters listed in Table 8-2. 5. At the BRC> prompt, type: get fwd_pwrThis command returns the current value of forward power from the RF Power AmpliÞer.Table 8-240W, 800 MHz PA Transmitter ParametersParameter Value or RangeForward Power Greater than 38.0 WattsReßected Power Less than 4.0 WattsVSWR Less than 2:1BRC> set tx_power 40setting transmitter power to 40 wattsTXLIN ATTENUATION: 5.000000TARGET POWER: 40.00 watts [46.02 dBm]ACTUAL POWER: 37.77 watts [45.07 dBm]POWER WINDOW: 38.20-> 41.89 watts [45.82 -> 46.22 dBm]TXLIN LEVEL REGISTER REDUCED 59 STEPS [-2.30 dB].TXLIN LEVEL: 0x6fcompleted successfullyBRC> get fwd_pwrFORWARD POWER is 39.13 watts [45.92 dBm]
8-14 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Station Verification Procedures6. At the BRC> prompt, type: get ref_pwrThis command returns the current value of reßected power from the RF Power AmpliÞer.7. At the BRC> prompt, type: get vswrThis command calculates the current Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) from the RF Power AmpliÞer.8. At the BRC> prompt, type: get alarmsThis command returns all active alarms of the Base Radio.NOTEIf the get alarms command displays alarms, refer to the System Troubleshooting section of this manual for corrective actions.9. View the spectrum of the transmitted signal on the R2660 Communications Analyzer in the Spectrum Analyzer mode.  Figure 8-3 shows a sample of the spectrum.10. At the BRC> prompt, type:   dekey This command stops all transmitter activity.BRC> get ref_pwrREFLECTED POWER is 0.27 watts [24.28 dBm]BRC> get vswrVSWR is 1.17:1BRC> get alarmsNO ALARM CONDITIONS DETECTEDBRC> dekeyXMIT OFF INITIATED
68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-15EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosStation Verification ProceduresTransmitter Verification Procedure(70W, 800 MHz Power Amplifiers – CTF1040) This procedure provides commands and responses to verify proper operation of the transmit path for 800 MHz Base Radios using a 70 Watt Power AmpliÞer. 1. Apply power to the Base Radio by setting the switch to the 1 position. The following message displays on the service computer during power-up.Figure:8-3Transmitted Signal Spectrum (800 MHz BR)EBTS071032394JNMBase Radiofirmware revision RXX.XX.XXCopyright  1998Motorola, Inc.  All rights reserved.Unauthorized access prohibitedEnter login password:
8-16 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Station Verification Procedures2. Enter the proper password.  After entering the correct password, the BRC> prompt is displayed on the service computer. The default password is motorolaNOTEMotorola recommends that you change the default password once proper operation of the equipment is veriÞed.3. At the BRC> prompt, type:   dekey This command veriÞes that there is no RF power being transmitted.CAUTIONThe following command keys the transmitter.  Make sure that transmission only occurs on licensed frequencies or into an RF load. BRC> dekeyXMIT OFF INITIATED
68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-17EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosStation Verification Procedures4. At the BRC> prompt, type: set tx_power 70This command sets the transmitter output to 70 Watts. After keying the Base Radio, verify the forward and reßected powers of the station along with the station VSWR with the parameters listed in Table 8-3.5. At the BRC> prompt, type: get fwd_pwrThis command returns the current value of forward power from the RF Power AmpliÞer.Table 8-370W, 800 MHz PA Transmitter ParametersParameter Value or RangeForward Power Greater than 66.5 WattsReßected Power Less than 7.0 WattsVSWR Less than 2:1BRC> set tx_power 70setting transmitter power to 70 wattsTXLIN ATTENUATION: 5.000000TARGET POWER: 70.00 watts [48.45 dBm]ACTUAL POWER: 56.70 watts [47.54 dBm]POWER WINDOW: 66.85 -> 73.30 watts [48.25 -> 48.65 dBm]TXLIN LEVEL REGISTER REDUCED 85 STEPS [-3.32 dB].TXLIN LEVEL: 0x55completed successfullyBRC> get fwd_pwrFORWARD POWER is 68.55 watts [48.36 dBm]
8-18 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Station Verification Procedures6. At the BRC> prompt, type: get ref_pwrThis command returns the current value of reßected power from the RF Power AmpliÞer.7. At the BRC> prompt, type: get vswrThis command calculates the current Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) from the RF Power AmpliÞer.8. At the BRC> prompt, type: get alarmsThis command returns all active alarms of the Base Radio.NOTEIf the get alarms command displays alarms, refer to the System Troubleshooting section of this manual for corrective actions.9. View the spectrum of the transmitted signal on the R2660 Communications Analyzer in the Spectrum Analyzer mode.  Figure 8-4 shows a sample of the spectrum.10. At the BRC> prompt, type:   dekey This command stops all transmitter activity.BRC> get ref_pwrREFLECTED POWER is 2.10 watts [33.22 dBm]BRC> get vswrVSWR is 1.42:1BRC> get alarmsNO ALARM CONDITIONS DETECTEDBRC> dekeyXMIT OFF INITIATED
68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-19EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosStation Verification ProceduresTransmitter Verification Procedure(60W, 900 MHz Power Amplifier – CLN1355)This procedure provides commands and responses to verify proper operation of the transmit path for 900 MHz Base Radios using 60 Watt Power AmpliÞer, CLN1355 (kit no. CTF1300). 1. Apply power to the Base Radio by setting the switch to the 1 position. The following message displays on the service computer during power-up.Figure:8-4Transmitted Signal Spectrum (800 MHz BR)EBTS071032394JNMBase Radiofirmware revision RXX.XX.XXCopyright  1998Motorola, Inc.  All rights reserved.Unauthorized access prohibitedEnter login password:
8-20 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Station Verification Procedures2. Enter the proper password.  After entering the correct password, the BRC> prompt is displayed on the service computer. The default password is motorolaNOTEMotorola recommends that you change the default password once proper operation of the equipment is veriÞed.3. At the BRC> prompt, type:   dekey This command veriÞes that there is no RF power being transmitted.CAUTIONThe following command keys the transmitter. Make sure that transmission only occurs on licensed frequencies or into an RF load. BRC> dekeyXMIT OFF INITIATED
68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-21EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosStation Verification Procedures4. At the BRC> prompt, type: set tx_power 60This command sets the transmitter output to 60 Watts. After keying the Base Radio, verify the forward and reßected powers of the station along with the station VSWR with the parameters listed in Table 8-4.5. At the BRC> prompt, type: get fwd_pwrThis command returns the current value of forward power from the RF Power AmpliÞer.Table 8-460W, 900 MHz PA – CLN1355 Transmitter ParametersParameter Value or RangeForward Power Greater than 58.0 WattsReßected Power Less than 6.0 WattsVSWR Less than 2:1BRC> set tx_power 60setting transmitter power to 60 wattsTXLIN ATTENUATION: 5.000000TARGET POWER: 60.00 watts [47.78 dBm]ACTUAL POWER: 56.70 watts [47.54 dBm]POWER WINDOW: 57.30 -> 62.85 watts [47.58 -> 47.98 dBm]TXLIN LEVEL REGISTER REDUCED 85 STEPS [-3.32 dB].TXLIN LEVEL: 0x55completed successfullyBRC> get fwd_pwrFORWARD POWER is 61.0 watts [47.88 dBm]
8-22 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Station Verification Procedures6. At the BRC> prompt, type: get ref_pwrThis command returns the current value of reßected power from the RF Power AmpliÞer.7. At the BRC> prompt, type: get vswrThis command calculates the current Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) from the RF Power AmpliÞer.8. At the BRC> prompt, type: get alarmsThis command returns all active alarms of the Base Radio.NOTEIf the get alarms command displays alarms, refer to the System Troubleshooting section of this manual for corrective actions.9. View the spectrum of the transmitted signal on the R2660 Communications Analyzer in the Spectrum Analyzer mode.  Figure 8-5 shows a sample of the spectrum.10. At the BRC> prompt, type:   dekey This command stops all transmitter activity.BRC> get ref_pwrREFLECTED POWER is 1.67 watts [32.22 dBm]BRC> get vswrVSWR is 1.42:1BRC> get alarmsNO ALARM CONDITIONS DETECTEDBRC> dekeyXMIT OFF INITIATED
68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-23EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosStation Verification ProceduresTransmitter Verification Procedure(40W, 1500 MHz Power Amplifier – TLN3426)  This procedure provides commands and responses to verify proper operation of the transmit path for 1500 MHz Base Radios using a 40 Watt Power AmpliÞer. 1. Apply power to the Base Radio by setting the switch to the 1 position. The following message displays on the service computer during power-up.EBTS071032394JNM937.5000EBTS418101797JNMFigure:8-5Transmitted Signal Spectrum (900 MHz BR)Base Radiofirmware revision RXX.XX.XXCopyright  1998Motorola, Inc.  All rights reserved.Unauthorized access prohibitedEnter login password:
8-24 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Station Verification Procedures2. Enter the proper password.  After entering the correct password, the BRC> prompt is displayed on the service computer. The default password is motorolaNOTEMotorola recommends that you change the default password once proper operation of the equipment is veriÞed.3. At the BRC> prompt, type:   dekey This command veriÞes that there is no RF power being transmitted.CAUTIONThe following command keys the transmitter.  Make sure that transmission only occurs on licensed frequencies or into a RF load. BRC> dekeyXMIT OFF INITIATED
68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-25EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosStation Verification Procedures4. At the BRC> prompt, type: set tx_power 40This command sets the transmitter output to 40 Watts. After keying the Base Radio, verify the forward and reßected powers of the station along with the station VSWR with the parameters listed in Table 8-5. 5. At the BRC> prompt, type: get fwd_pwrThis command returns the current value of forward power from the RF Power AmpliÞer.Table 8-540W, 1500 MHz PA Transmitter ParametersParameter Value or RangeForward Power Greater than 38.0 WattsReßected Power Less than 4.0 WattsVSWR Less than 2:1BRC> set tx_power 40setting transmitter power to 40 wattsTXLIN ATTENUATION: 5.000000TARGET POWER: 40.00 watts [46.02 dBm]ACTUAL POWER: 28.38 watts [44.53 dBm]POWER WINDOW: 38.20-> 41.89 watts [45.82 -> 46.22 dBm]TXLIN LEVEL REGISTER REDUCED 59 STEPS [-2.30 dB].TXLIN LEVEL: 0x6fcompleted successfullyBRC> get fwd_pwrFORWARD POWER is 39.13 watts [45.92 dBm]
8-26 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Station Verification Procedures6. At the BRC> prompt, type: get ref_pwrThis command returns the current value of reßected power from the RF Power AmpliÞer.7. At the BRC> prompt, type: get vswrThis command calculates the current Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) from the RF Power AmpliÞer.8. At the BRC> prompt, type: get alarmsThis command returns all active alarms of the Base Radio.NOTEIf the get alarms command displays alarms, refer to the System Troubleshooting section of this manual for corrective actions.9. View the spectrum of the transmitted signal on the R2660 Communications Analyzer in the Spectrum Analyzer mode.  Figure 8-3 shows a sample of the spectrum.10. At the BRC> prompt, type:   dekey This command stops all transmitter activity.BRC> get ref_pwrREFLECTED POWER is 0.27 watts [24.28 dBm]BRC> get vswrVSWR is 1.17:1BRC> get alarmsNO ALARM CONDITIONS DETECTEDBRC> dekeyXMIT OFF INITIATED
68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-27EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosStation Verification ProceduresFigure:8-6Transmitted Signal Spectrum (1500 MHz BR)
8-28 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Station Verification ProceduresEquipment DisconnectionUse the following steps to disconnect equipment after verifying the transmitter. 1. Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker switch (located behind the front panel of the Power Supply) to the OFF (0) position.2. Disconnect the RS-232 cable from the connector on the service computer.3. Disconnect the other end of the RS-232 cable from the RS-232 connector located on the front panel of the BRC.4. Disconnect the test cable from the PA OUT connector located on the backplane of the Base Radio.5. Connect the standard equipment cable to the PA OUT connector.6. Disconnect the 10 dB attenuator from the other end of the test cable. 7. From the attenuator, disconnect the cable to the R2660 Communications Analyzer.8. Restore power to the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker switch to the ON (1) position.If necessary, continue with the Receiver VeriÞcation Procedure.Receiver VerificationThe receiver veriÞcation procedure sends a known test signal to the Base Radio to verify the receive path.  This veriÞcation procedure is recommended after replacing a Receiver, BRC, or Power Supply module.NOTEThe following procedure requires the Base Radio to be out of service.  Unless the Base Radio is currently out of service, Motorola recommends performing this procedure during off-peak hours.  This minimizes or eliminates disruption of service to system users.Equipment SetupSet up the equipment for the receiver veriÞcation procedure as follows:1. Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker switch (located behind the front panel of the Power Supply) to the OFF (0) position.2. Connect one end of the RS-232 cable to the service computer.
68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-29EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosStation Verification Procedures3. Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to the STATUS port located on the front panel of the BRC. 4. Disconnect the existing cable from the connector labeled RX1 (or the connector corresponding to the receiver under test).This connector is located on the backplane of the Base Radio.5. Connect a test cable to the RX 1 connector.6. Connect the other end of the test cable to the RF IN/OUT connector on the R2660 Communications Analyzer.7. Remove power from the R2660 and connect the Rubidium Frequency Standard 10MHZ OUTPUT to a 10 dB attenuator.8. Connect the other end of the 10 dB attenuator to the 10MHZ REFERENCE OSCILLATOR IN/OUT connector on the R2660.9. Set the R2660 to the EXT REF mode.10. Apply power to the R2660.NOTERefer to the equipment manual provided with the R2660 for further information regarding mode conÞguration of the unit (Motorola Part No. 68P80386B72). 11. Set the R2660 to the receive frequency of the Base Radio under test.All receivers within a single Base Radio have the same receive frequency.12. Set the R2660 to generate the test signal at an output level of -80dBm.Receiver Verification ProcedureThis procedure provides commands and responses to verify proper operation of the Base Radio receive path.  Perform the procedure on all three receivers in each Base Radio in the EBTS.The Bit Error Rate (BER) measurement meets speciÞcations at less than 0.01% (1.0e-02%) to pass the process.Before you begin the veriÞcation procedure, put the Base Radio into the test mode of operation to take it out of service.  Enable the desired receiver under test and disable the other receiver(s).  In this case the receiver under test is receiver #1.In the following procedures, enter the software commands as they appear after the prompt.  These commands are in bold letters. For example, BRC> get rx_freq
8-30 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Station Verification Procedures13. Restore power to the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker switch to the ON (1) position.The following message displays on the service computer during power-up.14. Enter the proper password.  After entering the correct password, the BRC> prompt is displayed on the service computer. The default password is motorolaNOTEMotorola recommends that you change the default password once proper operation of the equipment is veriÞed.Base Radiofirmware revision RXX.XX.XXCopyright  1998Motorola, Inc.  All rights reserved.Unauthorized access prohibitedEnter login password:
68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-31EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosStation Verification Procedures15. At the BRC> prompt, type:   get rx_freqThis command displays the receive frequency for the current Base Radio.  For 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios, the message respectively appears as:800 MHz BR:900 MHz BR:1500 MHz BR:16. Verify that the R2660 transmit frequency is set to the frequency determined in the previous step.17. At the BRC> prompt, type: set rx_mode 1This command is used to enable the antenna/receiver under test.BRC> get rx_freqThe RX FREQUENCY is: 806.00000BRC> get rx_freqThe RX FREQUENCY is: 896.000BRC> get rx_freqThe RX FREQUENCY is: 1453.000BRC>set rx_mode 1set RECEIVER 1 to ENABLED in RAMset RECEIVER 2 to DISABLED in RAMset RECEIVER 3 to DISABLED in RAM
8-32 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Station Verification Procedures18. At the BRC> prompt, type:   get rssi 1 1000This commands returns the receive signal strength indication.  To pass the BER ßoor test, the Bit Error Rate must be less than 0.01% (1.0e-02%) for the displayed results.19. Verify that the RSSI dBm signal strength, for the receiver under test, is -80.0 dBm ± 1.0 dBm.  Adjust the R2660 signal output level to get the appropriate RSSI dBm level.  The BER ßoor % value is valid only if the RSSI signal strength is within the limits of -81.0 dBm to -79.0 dBm.20. At the BRC > prompt, type: get alarmsThis command returns all active alarms of the Base Radio.NOTEIf the get alarms command displays alarms, refer to the System Troubleshooting section for corrective actions.BRC> get rssi 1 1000Starting RSSI monitor for 1 repetitions averaged each 1000 reports.Line RSSI1 RSSI2 RSSI3 SGC  CI BER OffsetSyncMissdBm dBm dBm   dB  dBmdBm % Hz%----  ------ ------ ------  ---- ---------------------    -------    ---------0 -80.0 -131.5 -131.5   0 -79.2  -121.90.000e+00-5.4.000e+00BRC> get alarmsNO ALARM CONDITIONS DETECTED
68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-33EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosStation Verification Procedures21. At the BRC> prompt, type: get rx1_kit_noAs shown below respectively for 800 /900/1500 MHz Base Radios, this command returns the kit number of the receiver.800 MHz BR:900 MHz BR:1500 MHz BR:NOTEIf the kit number is CRF6010 or CRF6030, continue to step 22, otherwise to Equipment Disconnection.22. At the BRC> prompt, type: get rx_fru_configThis command lists the receivers active for diversity.NOTEIf the antenna conÞguration does not match the receiver conÞguration, use the set rx_fru_config MMI command to properly set the parameter.BRC> get rx1_kit_noRECEIVER 1 KIT NUMBER IS CRF6010ABRC> get rx1_kit_noRECEIVER 1 KIT NUMBER IS CRF6030ABRC> get rx1_kit_noRECEIVER 1 KIT NUMBER IS CRX1020BBRC> get rx_fru_configRECEIVER CONFIGURATION {RX1 RX2 RX3}
8-34 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Station Verification ProceduresEquipment Disconnection Disconnect equipment after verifying the receiver as follows:1. Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker switch (located behind the front panel of the Power Supply) to the OFF (0) position.2. Disconnect the RS-232 cable from the connector on the service computer.3. Disconnect the other end of the RS-232 cable from the RS-232 connector on the front panel of the BRC.4. Disconnect the test cable from the RX 1 connector located on the backplane of the Base Radio.5. Connect the standard equipment cable to the RX 1 connector.6. Disconnect the cable to the R2660 Communications Analyzer.7. Restore power to the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker switch to the ON (1) position.This completes the Receiver VeriÞcation Procedure for the receiver under test.Repeat the Receiver VeriÞcation Procedure for each receiver in every Base Radio in the EBTS.
68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-35EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosSingle Channel BR BackplaneSingle Channel BR BackplaneBackplane ConnectorsAll external equipment connections are made on the Base Radio backplane.  Table 8-6 lists and describes each of the connectors on the backplane.Table 8-6Base Radio Backplane Connectors Connector  Description  Type RX 1 through RX 3 Provides the input path for the received signal to the Base Radio.  Each receiver has an input for one of these signals.Connect these ports to a multicoupler distribution system and surge protection circuitry before connecting them to the receive antennas.RF-type connector in Table 8EX OUT/EX FBPA IN/PA FBConnects the exciter and PAs together to form the transmitter for the Base Radio.  These connections are usually made at the factoryThese four ports close the feedback loop between these two modules by connecting EX OUT to the PA IN and the EX FB to the PA FBRF-type connectors in Table 21 and Table 22PA OUT Transmits the RF output of the Base Radio.  Connect this port to a combiner or duplexer before connecting to the transmit antennaRF-type connector in Table 22 ETHERNET A (or labeled ETHERNET on some production units)Provides Ethernet connectivity to the Base Radio from the site controller.  This Ethernet port connects directly to the BRCBNC-type connector in Table 185MHZ/ 1 PPS-A (or labeled SPARE on some production units)Serves as both the timing and frequency reference port for the Base RadioThis port is connected to the site timing/frequency reference.BNC-type connector in Table 20RS-232  This is a DTE RS-232 interface provided for future use and is not currently enabledDB-9-type connectors in Table 17ALARM Provides the connection for external calibrated power monitors to the Base RadioThis connector also provides station DC voltages and programming lines (SPI) for monitoring/potential future expansionDB-25-type connectorAC POWER  Provides connection to AC power supply, if the Base Radio is equipped with an AC power supplyLine cord connectorDC POWER Provides DC power connection, if the Base Radio is equipped with a DC power supply or an AC power supply to support the battery revert featureCard edge connectorGROUND Connects the station to ground.  A ground stud and a ground braid on the back of the Base Radio connect the station to a site ground, such as an appropriately grounded cabinetThis ground provides increased transient/surge protection for the stationGround stud
8-36 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Single Channel BR BackplaneFigure 8-7 shows the locations of the Base Radio external connections.Backplane RF ConnectionsWhen Base Radios are shipped from the factory as FRUs, each connection on the back of a repeater has a designated color dot beside it as listed in Table 8-7.  To Þnd where a cable should be connected, match the label wrapped around the cable to the dot on the back of the repeater.Table 8-7Color Codes for RF Connections on Rear of Base RadioConnectors Color Dot CodeTX OrangeRX 1 RedRX 2 GreenRX 3 YellowEthernet White5 MHz/1 pps A or SpareGrayEX OUTPA INEXPA FBDC POWERAC POWERRS 232ALARM5MHZ/1 PPS BRX 1RX 2RX 35MHZ/1 PPS AETHERNET APA OUTGROUNDEBTS327021997JNMRE BLACKThis port must be terminated by 50Ω load when configured for2 Branch Diversity. Also, the rx_fru_config parameter must be set to R12.**Figure:8-7Base Radio Backplane Connectors
68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-37EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosSingle Channel BR BackplaneBackplane Connector PinoutsTable 8 lists the pin-outs for the 96-pin P1 connector of the Base Radio Controller board.Table 12 lists the pin-outs for the 96-pin P1 connector for Receiver 1.Table 8    P1 Connector Pin-outsPin No. Row A Row B  Row C1 AGC3 14.2V AGC12 AGC4 14.2V AGC23 GND GND GND4 RESET GND GND5 BATT_STAT GND GND6 CTS GND GND7 RTS 5V 5V85V 5V 5V95V 5V 5V10 SHUTDOWN 5V11 RCLK 5V DATA112 ODC_1 5V DATA1*13 TCLK GND DATA314 ODC_3 GND DATA3*15 RXD GND DATA216 ODC_2 DATA2*17 TXD18 SSI SBI_119 SSI* SBI_320 BRG GND SBI_221 CLK22 CLK* GND A423 GND A324 A5 GND A225 A0 GND A126 CD GND 5MHZ/SPARE27 METER_STAT GND SPI_MISO28 WP* GND SPI_CLK29 GND GND SPI_MOSI30 GND GND GD31 1PPS_GPS GND 2.1MHZ_TX32 GND GND 2.1MHZ_RXNOTE:  * = enabled lowTable 9    P1 Connector Pin-outs Pin No. Row A Row B  Row C1 AGC3 GND AGC12 AGC4 GND AGC23 GND GND GND4 GND GND GND5 14.2V 14.2V 14.2V6 14.2V 14.2V 14.2V7 GND GND GND8 GND GND GND9 5V5V5V10 5V 5V 5V11 GND GND GND12 GND GND GND13 DATA1* GND GND14 DATA1 GND GND15 ODC_1 GND GND16 GND GND GND17 GND GND GND18 SBI_1 GND GND19 GND GND GND20 GND GND GND21 A0_CS122 A1_CS223 A524 WP*25 A4_RXSEL2627 SPI_MISO28 SPI_MOSI29 SPI_CLK30 GND GND GND31 GND GND GND32 GND GND 2.1MHZ_RXNOTE:  * Enabled low
8-38 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Single Channel BR BackplaneTable 13 lists the pin-outs for the 96-pin P2 connector for Receiver 2.Table 11 lists the pin-outs for the 96-pin P3 connector for Receiver 3.Table 10    P2 Connector Pin-outs Pin No. Row A Row B  Row C1 AGC3 GND AGC12 AGC4 GND AGC23 GND GND GND4 GND GND GND5 14.2V 14.2V 14.2V6 14.2V 14.2V 14.2V7 GND GND GND8 GND GND GND9 5V5V5V10 5V 5V 5V11 GND GND GND12 GND GND GND13 DATA2* GND GND14 DATA2 GND GND15 ODC_2 GND GND16 GND GND GND17 GND GND GND18 SBI_2 GND GND19 GND GND GND20 GND GND GND21 A0_CS122 A1_CS223 A524 WP*25 A3_RXSEL2627 SPI_MISO28 SPI_MOSI29 SPI_CLK30 GND GND GND31 GND GND GND32 GND GND 2.1MHZ_RXNOTE:  * Enabled lowTable 11    P3 Connector Pin-outsPin No. Row A Row B  Row C1 AGC3 GND AGC12 AGC4 GND AGC23 GND GND GND4 GND GND GND5 14.2V 14.2V 14.2V6 14.2V 14.2V 14.2V7 GND GND GND8 GND GND GND9 5V5V5V10 5V 5V 5V11 GND GND GND12 GND GND GND13 DATA3* GND GND14 DATA3 GND GND15 ODC_3 GND GND16 GND GND GND17 GND GND GND18 SBI_3 GND GND19 GND GND GND20 GND GND GND21 A0_CS122 A1_CS223 A524 WP*25 A2_RXSEL2627 SPI_MISO28 SPI_MOSI29 SPI_CLK30 GND GND GND31 GND GND GND32 GND GND 2.1MHZ_RXNOTE:  * Enabled low
68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-39EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosSingle Channel BR BackplaneTable 12 lists the pin-outs for the 48-pin P2 connector of the 3X Receiver.Table 13 lists the pin-outs for the 16-pin P3 connector of the 3X Receiver.Table 14 lists the pin-outs for the 96-pin P5 connector of the Exciter.Table 12    P2 Connector Pin-outs Pin No. Row A Row B  Row C Row D1 GND AGC4 AGC3 GND2 GND AGC2 AGC1 A03 GND RX1_DATARX1_DATAA14 GND RX1_SBI RX1_ODC A25 GND RX2_DATARX2_DATAA36 5V RX2_SBI RX2_ODC A47 GND RX3_DATARX3_DATAA58 GND RX3_SBI RX3_ODC WP*9 14.2V SCLK MOSI MISO10 14.2V GND GND GND11 14.2V GND REF GND12 GND GND GND GNDNOTE:  Row A is make first, break last.Table 13    P3 Connector Pin-outs Pin No. Row ARow B  Row C Row DRow E1 GND GND GND2 RX13 GND GND GND4567 GND GND GND8 RX2 RX39 GND GND GNDTable 14    P5 Connector Pin-outsPin No. Row A Row B Row C1 28V 28V 28V2 28V 28V 28V3 14.2V 14.2V 14.2V4 14.2V 14.2V 14.2V55V5V5V65V5V5V7 GND GND EXT_VFWD8 GND GND EXT_VREF910 GND GND GND11 GND GND VBLIN12 GND GND RESET1314 GND GND GND15 GND GND SPI_MISO16 A0 GND GND17 GND GND SPI_CLK18 A1 GND WP*19 GND GND GND20 A5 GND SPI_MOSI21 GND GND GND22 A4 GND GND23 GND GND CLK*24 A3 GND GND25 GND GND CLK26 GND GND GND27 GND GND SSI*28 GND GND GND29 GND GND SSI30 GND GND GND31 GND GND 2.1MHz_TX32 GND GND GNDNOTE:  * = enabled low
8-40 68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Single Channel BR BackplaneTable 15 lists the pin-outs for the 96-pin P6 connector of the Power AmpliÞer.Table 16 lists the pin-outs for the 25-pin P7 Alarm Table 17 lists the pin-outs for the 9-pin P8 RS-232 connector.Table 18 lists the pin-outs for P13.  Tables 19 through 22 list the pin-outs for the SMA and blindmate connectors for Receivers 1- 3, BRC, Exciter and PA.    Table 23 lists the pin-outs for 78-pin P9 connector of the Power Supply.Table 15    P6 Connector Pin-outsPin No. Row A Row B Row C1 VBLIN GND 28V2 GND GND 28V3 A0 GND 28V4 GND GND 28V5 A1 GND 28V6 GND GND 28V7 A2 GND 28V8 GND GND 28V9 A3 GND 28V10 GND GND 28V11 SPI_MISO GND 28V12 GND GND 28V13 SPI_MOSI GND 28V14 GND GND 28V15 SPI_CLK GND 28V16 GND GND 28V17 WP* GND 28V18 GND GND 28V19 GND GND 28V20 GND GND 28V21 GND GND 28V22 GND GND 28V23 GND GND 28V24 GND GND 28V25 GND 5V 28V26 GND 5V 28V27 GND 14.2V 28V28 GND 14.2V 28V29 GND 14.2V 28V30 GND 14.2V 28V31 GND 28V 28V32 GND 28V 28VNOTE:  * = enabled lowTable 16    P7 Connector Pin-outsPin No. Signal1 SPI_MISO2 SPI_MOSI3 SPI_CLK4A05A16A27A38A49A510 GND11 28V12 14.2V13 14.2V14 WP*15 5V16 GND17 BATT_STAT18 MTR_STAT19 EXT_VFWD20 EXT_VREF21 GND22 GND23 BAT_TEMP24 VAT_TEMP25 GNDNOTE:  * = enabled low
68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-41EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosSingle Channel BR BackplaneTable 17    P8 Connector Pin-outsPin No. Signal1CD2 RxD3 TxD4 RCLK5 GND6 TCLK7RTS8 CTS9 BRGTable 18    P13 Connector Pin-outsConnector Signal1 ETHERNET - A (or 5MHZ IN*)* May appear as indicated in parenthesis on some production units.Table 19    SMA Connectors- ReceiversConnector SignalP19 RCV ONE RF INP20 RCV TWO RF INP21 RCV THREE RF INTable 20    Blind Mates - BRCConnector SignalP10 SPARE* (or 5MHZ/1 PPS - A) P11 ETHERNET* (or ETHERNET - A) *May appear as indicated in parenthesis on some production units.Table 21    Blind Mates - ExciterConnector SignalP14 EXCITER OUTP15 EXCITER FEEDBACK
8-42 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Single Channel BR BackplaneTable 22    Blind Mates - PAConnector SignalP16 PA FEEDBACKP17 PA INP18 PA RF OUTTable 23    P9 Connector Pin-outs  Pin No. Signal1 GND2 GND3 28V4 28V5 28V6 28V7 28V8 28V9 28V10 28V11 28V12 28V13 28V14 28V15 28V16 14.2V17 14.2V18 14.2V19 14.2V20 14.2V21 14.2V22 14.2V23 14.2V24 5V25 5V26 5V27 5V28 5V29 5V30 5V31 5V
68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-43EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosSingle Channel BR Backplane32 GND33 GND34 GND35 GND36 GND37 GND38 GND39 GND40 GND41 GND42 GND43 GND44 GND45 GND46 GND47 GND48 GND49 GND50 GND51 GND52 GND53 GND54 SCR_SHUT55 SCR_THRESH56 RELAY_ENABLE57 SHUTDOWN58 28V_AVG59 BATT_TEMP60 SPI_MISO61 SPI_MOSI62 SPI_CLK6364656667 A0(CS1)68 A1(CS2)Table 23    P9 Connector Pin-outs  (Continued)Pin No. Signal
8-44 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Single Channel BR Backplane69 A57071 A47273 A374 GND75 A276 GND77 GND78 GNDTable 23    P9 Connector Pin-outs  (Continued)Pin No. Signal
68P81095E02-D   4/1/2000 8-45EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosSingle Channel BR BackplaneBase Radio SignalsTable 8-24 lists and describes the Base Radio signals.Table 8-24Base Radio Signal Descriptions  Signal Name Signal Description GND Station ground28V 28VDC14.2V 14.2VDC5.1V 5.1 VDCA0,A1,A2,A3,A4,A5 The BRC uses these lines to address station modules and devices on those modulesSPI_MOSI Serial Processor Interface - Master out slave in DataSPI_MISO Serial Processor Interface - Master in slave out DataSPI_CLK Serial Processor Interface - Clock signal (100 KHz - 1 MHz)AGC1, AGC2, AGC3, AGC4  BRC uses these lines to set the digital attenuator's on the receiver(s) for SGC functionality2.1MHz_RX 2.1MHz generated on the BRC and used as a reference by the Receiver(s)2.1MHz_TX 2.1MHz generated on the BRC and used as a reference by the ExciterDATA1, DATA1* This differential pair carries receiver 1 data to the Base Radio ControllerDATA2 DATA2* This differential pair carries receiver 2 data to the Base Radio ControllerDATA3, DATA3* This differential pair carries receiver 3 data to the Base Radio ControllerODC_1, ODC_2, ODC_3 Clocks used to clock differential receive data from each respective receiver to the BRCSBI_1, SBI_2, SBI_3 Serial Bus Interface - These lines are used to program the custom receiver IC on each receiverSSI, SSI* Differential transmit data from the Exciter to the BRCCLK, CLK* Differential Data clock used to clock transmit data from the BRC to the ExciterBRCVBLIN Programmable bias voltage generated on the Exciter and used to bias the Power ampliÞer devicesVBLIN Programmable bias voltage generated on the Exciter and used to bias the Power ampliÞer devicesRESET Output from BRC to Exciter (currently not used)EXT_VFWD DC voltage representing the forward power at the antenna as measured by the external wattmeterEXT_VREF DC voltage representing the reßected power at the antenna as measured by the external wattmeterWP* Write protect line used by the BRC to write to serial EEPROMs located on each moduleBAT_STAT Binary ßag used to signal BRC to monitor the External battery supply alarm
8-46 68P81095E02-D 4/1/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Single Channel BR BackplaneMETER_STAT Binary ßag used by the BRC to indicate to the BRC it should monitor 1PPS Global Positioning System - 1 pulse per second (this may be combined with 5MHz at the site frequency referenceRCLK RS-232 - Receive clockTCLK RS-232 - Transmit clockCTS RS-232 - Clear to sendRTS RS-232 - Request to sendCD RS-232 - Carrier detectRXD RS-232 - Receive dataTXD RS-232 - Transmit dataBRG RS-232 - Baud rate generator5MHz / Spare signal currently not usedEXCITER_OUT Forward transmit path QQAM at approximately a 11dBm levelEXCITER_FEEDBACK Signal comes from the PA at approximately a 16dBm.  Used to close the cartesian RF_LOOPPA_IN 4 dBm QQAM forward path of the transmitterPA_FEEDBACK Signal to the Exciter at approximately 16dBm.  Used to close the cartesian RF_LOOPRX1_IN RF into Receiver 1RX2_IN RF into Receiver 2RX3_IN RF into Receiver 35MHZ REFERENCE 5MHz station/site reference.  Signal comes from the redundant site frequency reference and usually is multiplexed with the 1PPS signal from the global positioning satellite input to the site frequency referenceETHERNET Interface between the BRC and the ACG.  This connects the Base to the 10 MHz LANSCR_SHUT Signal currently not usedSCR_THRESH Signal currently not usedRELAY ENABLE Signal currently not usedSHUTDOWN Input signal from the BRC to the Power supply.  Used to exercise a station "hard startÓ 28V_AVG Signal currently not usedBATT_TEMP DC voltage from the external batteries used to represent the temperature of the batteries.  Signal used only with AC power suppliesNOTE:  * = enabled lowTable 8-24Base Radio Signal Descriptions  (Continued)Signal Name Signal Description
 68P81095E02-D   12/12/2000 9 - 1 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios 9   TroubleshootingQUAD Channel Base Radios Overview This chapter is a guide for installing a Quad Base Radio and isolating Base Radio failures to the FRU level.  The chapter contains procedures for: ❐ Troubleshooting ❐ Installation ❐ VeriÞcation ❐ Station OperationThe Base Radio maintenance philosophy is repair by replacing defective FRUs with new FRUs.  This maintenance method limits down-time, and quickly restores the Base Radio to normal operation. Two Base Radio troubleshooting procedures appear here.  Each procedure quickly identifies faulty FRUs. Ship defective FRUs to a Motorola repair depot for repair. Recommended Test Equipment Table 9-1 lists recommended test equipment for performing Base Radio troubleshooting and veriÞcation procedures.
 9-2 68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Table 9-1 Recommended Test Equipment Test Equipment Model Number Use Communications Analyzer R2660 w/iDEN option Used for checking receive and transmit operation (iDEN signaling capability) and station alignmentSignal Generator HP4432b RX testingDummy Load (50  Ω , 150 W ) none Used to terminate output3 way RF splitter none Used to connect Hp4432b to Base radioService Computer IBM or clone, 80286 or betterLocal service terminalPortable Rubidium Frequency StandardBall Efratom Frequency standard for R2660, netting TFRPower Meter none Used to measure reßected and forward powerRF Attenuator, 250 W, 10 dB Motorola 0180301E72 Protection for R2660Software:CommunicationQuad BR waveformProcomm PlusMotorola suppliedLocal service computerwith HP4432b
 68P81095E02-D   12/12/2000 9 - 3 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Troubleshooting Procedures Many troubleshooting and station operation procedures require Man-Machine Interface (MMI) commands.  These commands communicate station level commands to the Base Radio via the RS-232 communications port on the front of the BRC.  Routine Checkout Procedure 1 is a quick, non-intrusive test performed during a routine site visit.  Use this procedure to verify proper station operation without taking the station out of service.  Figure 9-1 shows the Procedure 1 Troubleshooting Flowchart.Figure:9-1Procedure 1 Troubleshooting Flowchart PROCEDURE 1 ROUTINESITE VISITOBSERVE LEDINDICATORSModule Suspected  of Being Faulty?NoNoDONECHECK CURRENTALARM STATUSUse MMI commandget alarmsto check alarm statusModule Suspected  of Being Faulty?Ye s  Go to TroubleshootingProcedure 2 Flow ChartYe s  Go to TroubleshootingProcedure 2 Flow ChartRefer toControls and Indicatorsfor LED DefinitionsEBTS021071895JNM
 9-4 68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Reported/Suspected Problem Use Procedure 2 to troubleshoot reported or suspected equipment malfunctions. Perform this procedure with equipment in service (non-intrusive) and with equipment taken temporarily out of service (intrusive).Figure 9-2 shows the Procedure 2 Troubleshooting Flowchart.Figure:9-2Procedure 2 Troubleshooting FlowchartPROCEDURE 2PROBLEMREPORTED OR SUSPECTEDDONEClear Problem ReportOBSERVE LEDINDICATORSModule Suspected  of Being Faulty?Ye s  Go to Module ReplacementProcedures SectionNoCHECK CURRENTALARM STATUSUse MMI commandget alarmsto check alarm statusModule Suspected  of Being Faulty?  Go to Module ReplacementProcedures SectionPERFORMVERIFICATION TESTSUse MMI commands toperform tests as specified instation verification procedure.Module Suspected  of Being Faulty?  Go to Module ReplacementProcedures SectionYe sNoYe sNoRefer toControls and Indicatorsfor LED DefinitionsEBTS022071895JNM
 68P81095E02-D   12/12/2000 9 - 5 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures Replace suspected station modules with known non-defective modules to restore the station to proper operation.  The following procedures provide FRU replacement instructions, post-replacement adjustments and veriÞcation instructions. Base Radio Replacement ProcedureNOTE Base Radio removal and installation procedures appear for reference or buildout purposes.  Field maintenance of Base Radios typically consists of replacement of FRUs within the Base Radio.  Perform Base Radio FRU replacement according to ÒBase Radio  FRU Replacement ProcedureÓ below.Perform Base Radio (BR) replacement as described in the following paragraphs.CAUTION! Improper lifting or dropping the BR could result in serious personal injury or equipment damage.Base Radios are HEAVY!Handle the BR with extreme caution, and according to  local health and safety regulations. Removal Remove the BR from the Equipment Cabinet as follows:CAUTION! A Single Carrier BR can weigh up to 76 LBS (34 KG). A Quad Carrier BR can weigh up to 91 LBS (41 KG). Handle the BR with extreme caution, and according to  local health and safety regulations.
 9-6 68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures 1. Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply ON/OFF switch to the OFF position. 2. Tag and disconnect the cabling from the BR rear panel connectors. 3. Remove the Power AmpliÞer module to reduce the BR weight. Remove the two M10 Torx screws that secure the Power AmpliÞer module. Slide the module out of the chassis. 4. Remove the four M30 TORX screws which secure the BR front panel to the Equipment Cabinet mounting rails. 5. While supporting the BR, carefully remove the BR from the Equipment Cabinet by sliding the BR from the front of cabinet.  When the BR becomes free from its mounting rails, be sure to fully support it. Installation Install BR in Equipment Cabinet as follows:CAUTION! A Single Carrier BR can weigh up to 76 LBS (34 KG). A Quad Carrier BR can weigh up to 91 LBS (41 KG). Handle the BR with extreme caution, and according to  local health and safety regulations. 1. If adding a BR, install side rails in the appropriate BR mounting position in the rack. 2. Remove the Power AmpliÞer module to reduce the BR weight. Remove the two M10 Torx screws that secure the Power AmpliÞer module. Slide the module out of the chassis. 3. While supporting the BR, carefully lift and slide the BR in the Equipment Cabinet mounting position. 4. Secure the BR to the Equipment Cabinet mounting rails using four M30 Torx screws.  Tighten the screws to 40 in-lb (4.5 Nm). 5. Slide the Power AmpliÞer module back into the BR chassis. Replace two M10 Torx screws that secure the Power AmpliÞer module. Secure the module by tightening the screws to the speciÞed torque of 5 in-lbs. 6. Connect the cabinet cabling to the BR. Refer to Backplane Þgure XX. 7. Perform BR activation as decribed below.
 68P81095E02-D   12/12/2000 9 - 7 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement ProceduresNOTE Base Radio removal and installation procedures appear for reference or buildout purposes.  Field maintenance of Base Radios typically consists of replacement of FRUs within the Base Radio.  Perform Base Radio FRU replacement according to ÒBase Radio  FRU Replacement ProcedureÓ below. Anti-Static PrecautionsCAUTION The Base Radio contains static-sensitive devices. Prevent electrostatic discharge damage to Base Radio modules! When replacing Base Radio FRUs, wear a grounded wrist strap. Observe proper anti-static  procedures.Motorola publication 68P81106E84 provides complete static protection information.  This publication is available through Motorola National Parts. Observe the following additional precautions: ❐ Wear a wrist strap (Motorola Part No. 4280385A59 or equivalent) at all times when servicing the Base Radio to minimize static build-up. ❐ A grounding clip is provided with each EBTS cabinet.  If not available, use another appropriate grounding point. ❐ DO NOT insert or remove modules with power applied to the Base Radio.  ALWAYS turn the power OFF using the Power Supply rocker switch on the front of the Power Supply module. ❐ Keep spare modules in factory packaging for transporting.  When shipping modules, always pack in original packaging. FRU Replacement Procedure Perform the following steps to replace any of the Base Radio FRUs:
 9-8 68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement ProceduresNOTE After a Control Board or BR replacement, the integrated Site Controller (iSC) reboots the BR. Whenever the BR goes off-line, the Replacement BRC Accept Timer begins counting down. A BR reboot occurs if the BR remains off-line as the timer times out. (The timerÕs default period is three minutes.) If someone turns on the BR before the timer times out, power down the BR. Then wait for the minimum  timer period before turning on the BR. 1. Notice the Power Supply rocker switch, behind the front panel of the Power Supply. Set the Power Supply rocker switch to the OFF (0) position. Turning off this switch removes power from the Base Radio. 2. Loosen the front panel fasteners.  These are located on each side of the module being replaced. 3. Pull out the module. 4. Insert the non-defective replacement module by aligning the module side rails with the appropriate rail guides inside the Base Radio chassis.   5. Gently push the replacement module completely into the Base Radio chassis assembly using the module handle(s). CAUTION DO NOT slam or force the module into the chassis assembly.  Rough handling can damage the connectors  or backplane. 6. Secure the replacement module by tightening the front panel fasteners to the speciÞed torque of 5 in-lbs. 7. Apply power to the Base Radio by setting the switch to the ON position. 8. Perform the Station VeriÞcation Procedure.
 68P81095E02-D   12/12/2000 9 - 9 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures Power Amplifier (PA) Fan FRU Replacement Perform the following steps to replace the Power AmpliÞer (PA) fans. 1. Remove the Power AmpliÞer from the Base Radio per FRU Replacement Procedure. 2. Disconnect fan power cable from PA housing. 3. Remove front panel from fan assembly. 4. Remove fan assembly from PA chassis.  NOTE To install the new fan kit, reverse above procedure.
 9-10 68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Station Verification Procedures Station Verification Procedures Perform the Station VeriÞcation Procedures whenever you replace a FRU.  The procedures verify transmit and receive operations.  Each procedure also contains the equipment setup. Replacement FRU Verification Before shipment, the factory programs all module-speciÞc information.  Base Radio speciÞc information (e.g., receive and transmit frequencies) involves a download to the Base Radio from the network/site controller.The Base Radio does not require replacement FRU alignment.  Base Repeater FRU Hardware Revision VerificationNOTE The following procedure requires the Base Radio to be out of service.  Unless the Base Radio is currently out of service, Motorola recommends performing this procedure during off-peak hours.  Performing this procedure then minimizes or eliminates disruption of  service to system users. 1. Connect one end of the RS-232 cable to the service computer. 2. Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to the STATUS port, located on the front panel of the EX/CNTL module. 3. Power on the BR using the front switch on the Power Supply Module. Press the reset button on the Control Module front panel. At the prompt, hit a Carriage Return on the service computer to enter the test application mode. Using the password  Motorola , log in to the BR.:> login -ufieldpassword: *****field>motorolafield>
 68P81095E02-D   12/12/2000 9 - 11 EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios Station Verification Procedures 4. Collect revision numbers from the station by typing the following command: 5. If all modules return revision numbers of the format ÒRxx.xx.xxÓ, then all revision numbers are present. In that case, veriÞcation requires no further action. If revision numbers return as blank, or not in the format ÒRxx.xx.xxÓ, contact your local Motorola representative or Technical Support. 6. Set desired cabinet id and position and of BR by typing the following commands with the Þnal number on each command being the desired cabinet id and position. The command example below sets cabinet id to 5, and cabinet position to 2. 7. After checking all BRs, log out by keying the following command:Transmitter VerificationThe transmitter veriÞcation procedure veriÞes transmitter operation and transmit path integrity.  Motorola recommends this veriÞcation procedure after replacing an Exciter, Power AmpliÞer, BRC, or Power Supply module.field> fv -oplatformfield>field> ci -oplatform -c5field> pi -oplatform -p2field>field> logoutfield>
9-12 68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Station Verification ProceduresNOTEThe following procedure requires the Base Radio to be out of service.  Unless the Base Radio is currently out of service, Motorola recommends performing this procedure during off-peak hours.  Performing this procedure then minimizes or eliminates disruption of service to system users.Equipment SetupTo set up the equipment, use the following procedure:1. Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker switch (located behind the front panel of the Power Supply) to the OFF (0) position.2. Connect one end of the RS-232 cable to the service computer.3. Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to the STATUS port located on the front panel of the BRC. 4. Disconnect the existing cable from the connector labeled PA OUT. This connector is located on the backplane of the Base Radio.5. Connect a test cable to the PA OUT connector.6. Connect a 10 dB attenuator on the other end of the test cable.7. From the attenuator, connect a cable to the RF IN/OUT connector on the R2660 Communications Analyzer.8. Remove power from the R2660. Connect the Rubidium Frequency Standard 10MHZ OUTPUT to a 10 dB attenuator.9. Connect the other end of the 10 dB attenuator to the 10MHZ REFERENCE OSCILLATOR IN/OUT connector on the R2660.NOTERefer to the R2660 equipment manual for further information regarding mode conÞguration of the unit. (Motorola Part No. 68P80386B72.)10. Set the R2660 to the EXT REF mode.11. Apply power to the R2660.12. Set the R2660 to the SPECTRUM ANALYZER mode with the center frequency set to the transmit frequency of the Base Radio under test.
68P81095E02-D   12/12/2000 9-13EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosStation Verification Procedures13. Perform the appropriate transmitter veriÞcation procedure below for the particular Power AmpliÞer used in the Base Radio.Transmitter Verification Procedure(QUAD Carrier 800 MHz Power Amplifiers)This procedure provides commands and responses to verify proper operation of the transmit path for 800 MHz Base Radios using a 70 Watt Power AmpliÞer. 1. Power on the BR using the front switch on the Power Supply Module. Press the reset button on the Control Module front panel. At the prompt, hit a Carriage Return on the service computer to enter the test application mode. Using the password Motorola, login to the BR.2. Dekey the BR to verify that no RF power is being transmitted. Set the transmit DSP test mode to Òstop.Ó At the Þeld> prompt, type: CAUTION!The following command keys the transmitter.  Make sure that transmission only occurs on licensed frequencies, or into an RF dummy load. 3. Key the BR to 40 watts, following the steps below from the Þeld> prompt : 3.1 Set the frequency of transmit channel 1 through 4.:> login -ufieldpassword: *****field>motorolafield>field> ptm -otx_all -mstopfield> power -otxch1 -p0 field>
9-14 68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Station Verification Procedures3.2 Set the transmit DSP test mode to Òdnlk_framed.Ó3.3 Enable the channels by setting a data pattern to Òiden.Ó3.4 Set the transmit power to 40 watts and key the BR.4. After keying the Base Radio, verify the stationÕs forward and reßected power and VSWR. Check these Þgures against the parameters in Table 9-2.Table 9-2QUAD BRTransmitter ParametersParameter Value or RangeForward Power Greater than 36 WattsReßected Power Less than 2.0 WattsVSWR Less than 1.6:1field> freq -otxch1 -f860field> freq -otxch2 -f860.025field> freq -otxch3 -f860.05field> freq -otxch4 -f860.075field>field> ptm -otx_all -mdnlk_framedfield>field> dpm -otxch1 -midenfield> dpm -otxch2 -midenfield> dpm -otxch3 -midenfield> dpm -otxch4 -midenfield>field> power -otxch1 -p40field>
68P81095E02-D   12/12/2000 9-15EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosStation Verification Procedures4.1 Check channel 1. At the Þeld> prompt, type:4.2 Check channel 2. At the Þeld> prompt, type: 4.3 Check channel 3. At the Þeld> prompt, type: 4.4 Check channel 4. At the Þeld> prompt, type:5. This command returns all active alarms of the Base Radio. At the Þeld> prompt, type: NOTEIf the alarms command displays alarms, refer to the System Troubleshooting chapter for corrective actions.6. View the spectrum of the transmitted signal on the R2660 Communications Analyzer. Use the Spectrum Analyzer mode. Figure 9-3 shows a sample of the spectrum.field> power -otxch1field>field> power -otxch2field>field> power -otxch3field>field> power -otxch4field>field> alarms -ofault_hndlrfield>
9-16 68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Station Verification Procedures7. Dekey the BR to verify that no RF power is being transmitted. Set the transmit DSP test mode to Òstop." At the Þeld> prompt, type: Equipment DisconnectionUse the following steps to disconnect equipment after verifying the transmitter. 1. Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker switch (located behind the front panel of the Power Supply) to the OFF (0) position.2. Disconnect the RS-232 cable from the connector on the service computer.3. Disconnect the other end of the RS-232 cable from the RS-232 connector located on the front panel of the BRC.Figure:9-3Quad Channel Spectrum (800 MHz BR)field> ptm -otx_all -mstopfield> power -otxch1 -p0field>
68P81095E02-D   12/12/2000 9-17EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosStation Verification Procedures4. Disconnect the test cable from the PA OUT connector located on the backplane of the Base Radio.5. Connect the standard equipment cable to the PA OUT connector.6. Disconnect the 10 dB attenuator from the other end of the test cable. 7. From the attenuator, disconnect the cable to the R2660 Communications Analyzer.8. Restore power to the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker switch to the ON (1) position.9. If necessary, continue with the Receiver VeriÞcation Procedure.Receiver VerificationThe receiver veriÞcation procedure sends a known test signal into the Base Radio to verify the receive path.  This veriÞcation procedure is recommended after replacing a Receiver.NOTEThe following procedure requires the Base Radio to be out of service. Unless the base radio is currently out of service, Motorola recommends performing this procedure during off-peak hours. Performing this procedure then minimizes or eliminates disruption of services to system users.Equipment SetupSet up equipment for the receiver veriÞcation procedure as follows:1. Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker switch (located behind the front panel of the Power Supply) to the OFF (0) position.2. Connect one end of the RS-232 cable to the service computer.3. Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to the STATUS port located on the front panel of the BRC. 4. Disconnect the existing cable from the connector labeled RX1 (or the connector corresponding to the receiver under test). Connector RX1 is on the Base Radio backplane.5. Connect a test cable to the RX 1 connector.6. Use an HP4432b to measure BR performance
9-18 68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Station Verification Procedures7. Attach RF output from the HP4432b to a 3 way splitter.  Attach the output of the three way splitter to the antenna connections in the back of the BR.8. Attach the 'event 2' port in the rear panel to pin 6 on the front panel of the BR.9. The 4432b must have the Proprietary Tornado downlink Þles to be conÞgured correctly. 10. Turn on the 4432b.  Press the 'mode' key. Select the 'arbitrary waveform generator'. Select 'Dual Arb'. Goto 'waveform select' and choose Tornado. Choose 'waveform segments'. Select the 'load' softkey. Choose the softkey 'Store all To NVARB Memory'. Press the 'return' softkey.11. Select 'ARB setup' and set the sample clock to 100khz.12. Attach the TFR 5Mhz to the 'Gen ref in'.13. Set the reference frequency to the correct frequency (5Mhz) and select 'ARB Reference' EXT for external reference.14. Select the I/Q key. Goto the next page by selecting 'More (1 of 2)'. Turn 'ALC' off by selecting the softkey.15. Select the 'Mode' key again, followed by the 'arbitrary waveform generator' softkey, 'Dual Arb'16. Set the frequency and power out and turn on the modulation and RF out.Receiver Verification ProcedureThis procedure provides commands and responses to verify proper operation of Base Radio receiver paths. Perform the procedure on all four receivers in the BR.1. Power on the BR using the front switch on the Power Supply Module. Press the reset button on the Control Module front panel. At the prompt, hit a Carriage Return on the service computer to enter the test application mode. Using the password Motorola, login to the BR..2. ConÞgure the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) and Vector Signal Generator A to generate the desired Q-QAM test signal in a 3RX mode at the desired frequency.  The RF Power Out of Vector Signal Generator A should be set to -108 dBm>login –ufield>password: *****field>motorolafield>
68P81095E02-D   12/12/2000 9-19EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosStation Verification Procedures3. Using the MMI commands below, issue the command to put the BR into 3RX mode.  If the resulting bit error rates for receiver branches 1, 2, and 3 are less than 8%, the receiver has passed the test. 3.1 Start by checking Receiver 1. At the Þeld> prompt, type: 3.2 Check Receiver 2. At the Þeld> prompt, type: 3.3 Check Receiver 3. At the Þeld> prompt, type: field> freq -orxch1 -f810field> enable -orxch1 -sonfield> sge -orx_all -sofffield> es -orx_all -text_triggerfield> peer_performance_config -orxch1 -mpath -pallfield> peer_performance_report -orxch1 -a100 -r1field> field> freq -orxch2 -f810field> enable -orxch2 -sonfield> sge -orx_all -sofffield> es -orx_all -text_triggerfield> peer_performance_config -orxch2 -mpath -pallfield> peer_performance_report -orxch2 -a100 -r1field> field> freq -orxch3 -f810field> enable -orxch3 -sonfield> sge -orx_all -sofffield> es -orx_all -text_triggerfield> peer_performance_config -orxch3 -mpath -pallfield> peer_performance_report -orxch3 -a100 -r1field>
9-20 68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2Station Verification Procedures3.4 Check Receiver 4. At the Þeld> prompt, type: 4. Enter the command to return all active alarms of the Base Radio. At the Þeld> prompt, type: NOTEIf the command displays alarms, refer to the System Troubleshooting section for corrective actions.5. As an option, you may check kit numbers for the receiver and other modules. The following command returns this data. (The example below speciÞes 800 MHz Quad Base Radios.) At the Þeld> prompt, type:Equipment Disconnection After verifying receiver operation, disconnect equipment as follows:1. Notice the Power Supply rocker switch, behind the front panel of the Power Supply. Set the Power Supply rocker switch to the OFF (0) position. Turning off this switch removes power from the Base Radio.2. Disconnect the RS-232 cable from the connector on the service computer.field> freq -orxch4 -f810field> enable -orxch4 -sonfield> sge -orx_all -sofffield> es -orx_all -text_triggerfield> peer_performance_config -orxch4 -mpath -pallfield> peer_performance_report -orxch4 -a100 -r1field> field> alarms_ofault_hndlrfield> field> fv -oplatformfield>
68P81095E02-D   12/12/2000 9-21EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosStation Verification Procedures3. Disconnect the other end of the RS-232 cable from the RS-232 connector on the front panel of the BRC.4. Disconnect the test cable from the RX1, RX2, and RX3 connectors located on the backplane of the Base Radio.5. Connect the standard equipment cable to the RX1 connector.6. Restore power to the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker switch to the ON (1) position. This step completes the Receiver VeriÞcation Procedure for the receiver under test.7. Repeat the Receiver VeriÞcation Procedure for each Quad receiver in every Base Radio in the EBTS.
9-22 68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2QUAD Channel BR BackplaneQUAD Channel BR BackplaneBackplane ConnectorsThe Base Radio backplane includes all external equipment connections. Table 9-3 lists and describes the backplane connectors.Table 9-3Backplane ConnectorsConnector Module Description Connector TypeP1 EXBRC Signal 168 Pin AMP Z-Pack FuturebusP2 RX1 Signal 72 Pin AMP Z-Pack FuturebusP3  RX1 RF 6 coax Harting HarpakP4 RX2 Signal 72 Pin AMP Z-Pack FuturebusP5 RX2 RF 6 coax Harting HarpakP6 RX3 Signal 72 Pin AMP Z-Pack FuturebusP7 RX3 RF 6 coax Harting HarpakP8 RX4 Signal 72 Pin AMP Z-Pack FuturebusP9 RX4 RF 6 coax Harting HarpakP10 PA Signal 96 Pin EUROP11 PS Signal & Power  78 Pin AMP TeledensityP12aa. P12 is a cutout in the backplane with threaded inserts for securing the connector which mates directly to the power supply. PS -48 Vdc Power In 8 Pin AMP 530521-3P13 EX RF(EX from PA) SMA blindmateP14 EX RF(EX to PA) SMA blindmateP15 External / EXBRC Ethernet BNC blindmateP16 External / PA RF (PA from EX) SMA blindmateP17 External / PA RF (PA to EX) SMA BlindmateP18 External / PA TX Output SMA blindmateP19 RX Branch 1 RF SMAP20 RX Branch 2 RF SMAP21 RX Branch 3 RF SMAP22bb. P22 will not be placed on the Tornado backplane. However, the backplane shall be designed with P22 to allow for reuse on other products.External RS232 Dsub-9P23 External Alarm Dsub-25P24 External 5MHz/1PPS BNC
68P81095E02-D   12/12/2000 9-23EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosQUAD Channel BR BackplaneFigure 9-4 shows the locations of the Base Radio external connections.Backplane RF ConnectionsWhen the factory ships Base Radios as FRUs, each connection on the back of a repeater has a designated color dot beside it. See Table 9-4.  To Þnd where a cable should be connected, match the label wrapped around the cable to the dot on the back of the repeater.Table: 9-4Color Codes for RF Connections on Rear of Base RadioConnectors Color Dot CodeTX OrangeRX 1 RedRX 2 GreenRX 3 YellowEthernet White5 MHz/1 pps A or SpareGrayEX OUTPA INEXPA FBDC POWERAC POWERRS 232ALARM5MHZ/1 PPS BRX 1RX 2RX 35MHZ/1 PPS AETHERNET APA OUTGROUNDEBTS327021997JNMRE BLACKThis port must be terminated by 50Ω load when configured for2 Branch Diversity. Also, the rx_fru_config parameter must be set to R12.**Figure:9-4Base Radio Backplane ConnectorsTHIS PICTURE MUST BE CHANGED!
9-24 68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2QUAD Channel BR BackplaneBackplane Connector PinoutsTable 9-5 lists the pin-outs for the Base Radio Controller boardÕs 168-pin P1 connector. Table: 9-5EXBRC P1 Pinout, Signal and PowerRow ABCD1 GND 3.3 Vdc 3.3 Vdc NC2 GND 3.3 Vdc 14.2 Vdc 14.2 Vdc3 GND 3.3 Vdc 14.2 Vdc 14.2 Vdc4 GND GND GND GND5NCNCNCNC6 GND GND GND GND7 GND 16.8MHz_RX 16.8MHz_RX_RTN GND8 GND GND GND GND9 GND 5 MHz/1 PPS 3.3 Vdc 3.3 Vdc10 NC NC NC 3.3 Vdc11 TxD CTS DTR BRG12 RTS RxD DSR CD13 NC NC NC 3.3 Vdc14 NC NC SHUTDOWN_ SLEEP_15 PA_ENABLE NC 28.6 Vdc 14.2 Vdc16 NC NC NC 3.3 Vdc17 EXT_GPI_1_ EXT_GPI_2_ EXT_GPO_1_ EXT_GPO_2_18 BAT_STAT_ MTR_STAT_ EXT_VFWD EXT_VREV19 SPI_M3 SPI_M2 SPI_M1 SPI_M020 SPI_ENABLE SPI_MOSI SPI_MISO SPI_CLK21 SPI_A2 SPI_A1 SPI_A0 WP_22 NC RxRESET_ NC NC23 NC Clock_SyncB_ NC NC24 GND GND 3.3 Vdc 3.3 Vdc25 SSI_Data_D SSI_CLK_D SSI_FS_D 3.3 Vdc26 SSI_Data_D_RTN SSI_CLK_D_RTN NC 3.3 Vdc27 GND GND 3.3 Vdc 3.3 Vdc28 DSPIb_MOSI DSPIb_CLK DSPIb_EN_1 DSPIb_EN_229 DSPIb_MOSI_RTN DSPIb_CLK_RTN DSPIb_EN_3 NC30 GND GND 3.3 Vdc 3.3 Vdc31 GND SSI_Data_C SSI_CLK_C SSI_FS_C32 GND SSI_Data_C_RTN SSI_CLK_C_RTN NC 33 NC Clock_SyncA_ NC NC34 GND GND 3.3 Vdc 3.3 Vdc35 SSI_Data_B SSI_CLK_B SSI_FS_B 3.3 Vdc
68P81095E02-D   12/12/2000 9-25EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosQUAD Channel BR Backplane36 SSI_Data_B_RTN SSI_CLK_B_RTN NC 3.3 Vdc37 GND GND 3.3 Vdc 3.3 Vdc38 DSPIa_MOSI DSPIa_CLK DSPIa_EN_1 DSPIa_EN_239 DSPIa_MOSI_RTN DSPIa_CLK_RTN DSPIa_EN_3 NC40 GND GND 3.3 Vdc 3.3 Vdc41 GND SSI_Data_A SSI_CLK_A SSI_FS_A42 GND SSI_Data_A_RTN SSI_CLK_A_RTN NCTable: 9-6EXBRC P13 Pinout, Exciter from PACoaxial DescriptionCenter PA INOuter GNDTable: 9-7EXBRC P14 Pinout, Exciter to PACoaxial DescriptionCenter PA FeedbackOuter GNDTable: 9-8EXBRC P15 Pinout, EthernetCoaxial DescriptionCenter EthernetOuter GNDTable: 9-5EXBRC P1 Pinout, Signal and PowerRow ABCD
9-26 68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2QUAD Channel BR BackplaneRX1 ConnectionsTable 9-9RX1 P2 Pinout, Signal and PowerRow A B C D1 NC GND GND Clock_SyncA_2 GND DSPIa_MOSI_RTN DSPIa_CLK_RTN DSPIa_EN_13 GND DSPIa_MOSI DSPIa_CLK DSPIa_EN_24 GND GND GND GND5 14.2 SSI_CLK_A_RTN SSI_FS_B SSI_CLK_B_RTN6 14.2 SSI_CLK_A SSI_FS_A SSI_CLK_B7 14.2 GND GND GND8 14.2 SSI_Data_A_RTN GND SSI_Data_B9 GND SSI_Data_A GND SSI_Data_B_RTN10 GND NC NC NC11 3.3 RxRESET_ GND (ID0) GND (ID1)12 3.3 WP_ SPI_A0 SPI_A113 3.3 SPI_MISO SPI_CLK SPI_A214 GND SPI_M0 SPI_ENABLE SPI_MOSI15 GND SPI_M1 SPI_M2 SPI_M316 GND GND GND NC17 GND 16.8MHz_RX GND NC (WB switch)18 GND 16.8MHz_RX_RTN GND NC (MC switch)Table 9-10RX1 P3 Pinout, RF Input and Output ConnectionRow A B C D E1 GND - GND - GND2 - RX3_EXP3 - RX1_EXP3 -3 GND - GND - GND4 GND - GND - GND5 - RX2_EXP2 - RX1_EXP2 -6 GND - GND - GND7 GND - GND - GND8 - RX Branch 1 - RX1_EXP1 -9 GND - GND - GND
68P81095E02-D   12/12/2000 9-27EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosQUAD Channel BR BackplaneRX2 ConnectionsTable 9-11RX2 P4 Pinout, Signal and PowerRow A B C D1 NC GND GND Clock_SyncA_2 GND DSPIa_MOSI_RTN DSPIa_CLK_RTN DSPIa_EN_33 GND DSPIa_MOSI DSPIa_CLK DSPIa_EN_24 GND GND GND GND5 14.2 SSI_CLK_B_RTN NC NC6 14.2 SSI_CLK_B SSI_FS_B NC7 14.2 GND GND GND8 14.2 SSI_Data_B_RTN GND NC9 GND SSI_Data_B GND NC10 GND NC NC NC11 3.3 RxRESET_ NC (ID0) GND (ID1)12 3.3 WP_ SPI_A0 SPI_A113 3.3 SPI_MISO SPI_CLK SPI_A214 GND SPI_M0 SPI_ENABLE SPI_MOSI15 GND SPI_M2 SPI_M1 SPI_M316 GND GND GND NC17 GND 16.8MHz_RX GND NC (WB switch)18 GND 16.8MHz_RX_RTN GND NC (MC switch)Table 9-12RX2 P5 Pinout, RF Input and Output ConnectionRow A B C D E1 GND - GND - GND2 - RX3_EXP2 - RX2_EXP3 -3 GND - GND - GND4 GND - GND - GND5 - RX1_EXP1 - RX2_EXP2 -6 GND - GND - GND7 GND - GND - GND8 - RX Branch 2 - RX2_EXP1 -9 GND - GND - GND
9-28 68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2QUAD Channel BR BackplaneRX3 ConnectionsTable 9-13RX3 P6 Pinout, Signal and PowerRow A B C D1 NC GND GND Clock_SyncB_2 GND DSPIb_MOSI_RTN DSPIb_CLK_RTN DSPIb_EN_13 GND DSPIb_MOSI DSPIb_CLK DSPIb_EN_24 GND GND GND GND5 14.2 SSI_CLK_C_RTN SSI_FS_D SSI_CLK_D_RTN6 14.2 SSI_CLK_C SSI_FS_C SSI_CLK_D7 14.2 GND GND GND8 14.2 SSI_Data_C_RTN GND SSI_Data_D9 GND SSI_Data_C GND SSI_Data_D_RTN10 GND NC NC NC11 3.3 RxRESET_ GND (ID0) NC (ID1)12 3.3 WP_ SPI_A0 SPI_A113 3.3 SPI_MISO SPI_CLK SPI_A214 GND SPI_M2 SPI_ENABLE SPI_MOSI15 GND SPI_M1 SPI_M0 SPI_M316 GND GND GND NC17 GND 16.8MHz_RX GND GND (WB switch)18 GND 16.8MHz_RX_RTN GND NC (MC switch)Table 9-14RX3 P7 Pinout, RF Input and Output ConnectionRow A B C D E1 GND - GND - GND2 - RX1_EXP2 - RX3_EXP3 -3 GND - GND - GND4 GND - GND - GND5 - RX2_EXP1 - RX3_EXP2 -6 GND - GND - GND7 GND - GND - GND8 - RX Branch 3 - RX3_EXP1 -9 GND - GND - GND
68P81095E02-D   12/12/2000 9-29EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosQUAD Channel BR BackplaneRX4 ConnectionsTable 9-15RX4 P8 Pinout, Signal and PowerRow A B C D1 NC GND GND Clock_SyncB_2 GND DSPIb_MOSI_RTN DSPIb_CLK_RTN DSPIb_EN_33 GND DSPIb_MOSI DSPIb_CLK DSPIb_EN_24 GND GND GND GND5 14.2 SSI_CLK_D_RTN NC NC6 14.2 SSI_CLK_D SSI_FS_D NC7 14.2 GND GND GND8 14.2 SSI_Data_D_RTN GND NC9 GND SSI_Data_D GND NC10 GND NC NC NC11 3.3 RxRESET_ NC (ID0) NC (ID1)12 3.3 WP_ SPI_A0 SPI_A113 3.3 SPI_MISO SPI_CLK SPI_A214 GND SPI_M0 SPI_ENABLE SPI_MOSI15 GND SPI_M3 SPI_M2 SPI_M116 GND GND GND NC17 GND 16.8MHz_RX GND NC (WB switch)18 GND 16.8MHz_RX_RTN GND GND (MC switch)Table 9-16RX4 P9 Pinout, RF Input and Output ConnectionRow A B C D E1 GND - GND - GND2 - RX1_EXP3 - NC -3 GND - GND - GND4 GND - GND - GND5 - RX2_EXP3 - NC -6 GND - GND - GND7 GND - GND - GND8 - RX3_EXP1 - NC -9 GND - GND - GND
9-30 68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2QUAD Channel BR BackplanePA ConnectionsTable 9-17PA P10 Pinout, Signal and PowerRow A B C1 SPI_ENABLE GND 28.6 Vdc2 GND GND 28.6 Vdc3 SPI_A0 GND 28.6 Vdc4 GND GND 28.6 Vdc5 SPI_A1 GND 28.6 Vdc6 GND GND 28.6 Vdc7 SPI_A2 GND 28.6 Vdc8 GND GND 28.6 Vdc9 SPI_M0 GND 28.6 Vdc10 GND GND 28.6 Vdc11 SPI_M1 GND 28.6 Vdc12 GND GND 28.6 Vdc13 SPI_M2 GND 28.6 Vdc14 GND GND 28.6 Vdc15 SPI_M3 GND 28.6 Vdc16 GND GND 28.6 Vdc17 SPI_MISO GND 28.6 Vdc18 GND GND 28.6 Vdc19 SPI_MOSI GND 28.6 Vdc20 GND GND 28.6 Vdc21 SPI_CLK GND 28.6 Vdc22 GND 3.3 Vdc 28.6 Vdc23 WP* 3.3 Vdc 28.6 Vdc24 GND GND 28.6 Vdc25 PA_ENABLE GND 28.6 Vdc26 GND 14.2 Vdc 28.6 Vdc27 GND 14.2 Vdc 28.6 Vdc28 GND 14.2 Vdc 28.6 Vdc29 GND 14.2 Vdc 28.6 Vdc30 GND 28.6 Vdc 28.6 Vdc31 GND 28.6 Vdc 28.6 Vdc32 GND 28.6 Vdc 28.6 VdcTable: 9-18EXBRC P16 Pinout, PA from ExciterCoaxial DescriptionCenter PA INOuter GND
68P81095E02-D   12/12/2000 9-31EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosQUAD Channel BR BackplaneExternal Connections )Table: 9-19EXBRC P17 Pinout, PA to ExciterCoaxial DescriptionCenter PA FeedbackOuter GNDTable: 9-20EXBRC P18 Pinout, PA RF OUTCoaxial DescriptionCenter PA RF OUTOuter GNDTable: 9-21Backplane Coaxial and DCSignalP12 -48 Vdc PowerP13 EX OutP14 FeedbackP15 EthernetP16 PA InP17 PA FeedbackP18 PA RF OUTP19 RX Branch 1P20 RX Branch 2P21 RX Branch 3P24 5 MHz/1 PPSTable: 9-22Backplane Alarm 25Pin Dsub (P23)Alarm Signal1 EXT_GPI_1_2 EXT_GPO_1_3 GND4 EXT_GPI_2_5 EXT_GPO_2_6
9-32 68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2QUAD Channel BR Backplane78910 GND111213141516 GND17 BAT_STAT_18 MTR_STAT_19 EXT_VFWD20 EXT_VREV21 GND22 GND232425 GNDTable: 9-23Backplane RS-232 9 Pin Dsub (P22) RS-232 Signal1CD2 RxD3 TxD4 DTR5 GND6 DSR7RTS8 CTS9 BRG*Table: 9-22Backplane Alarm 25Pin Dsub (P23)Alarm Signal
68P81095E02-D   12/12/2000 9-33EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosQUAD Channel BR BackplanePS Connections-Table: 9-24PS Power and Signal (P11)Pin Description Pin Description Pin Description1 GND (Plug In) 31 3.3 Vdc 61 SPI_MOSI2 GND 32 GND 62 SPI_CLK3 GND 33 GND 63 N.C.4 28.6 Vdc 34 GND 64 N.C.5 28.6 Vdc 35 GND 65 N.C.6 28.6 Vdc 36 GND 66 N.C.7 28.6 Vdc 37 GND 67 SPI_A08 28.6 Vdc 38 GND 68 SPI_A19 28.6 Vdc 39 GND 69 SPI_M210 28.6 Vdc 40 GND 70 SPI_M311 28.6 Vdc 41 GND 71 SPI_M112 28.6 Vdc 42 GND 72 SLEEP_13 28.6 Vdc 43 GND 73 SPI_M014 28.6 Vdc 44 GND 74 WP_15 28.6 Vdc 45 GND 75 SPI_A216 14.2 Vdc 46 GND 76 GND17 14.2 Vdc 47 GND 77 GND18 14.2 Vdc 48 GND 78 GND19 14.2 Vdc 49 GND20 14.2 Vdc 50 GND21 14.2 Vdc 51 GND2 14.2 Vdc 52 GND23 14.2 Vdc 53 GND24 3.3 Vdc 54 NC (FAN CON-TROL)25 3.3 Vdc 55 N.C.26 3.3 Vdc 56 N.C.27 3.3 Vdc 57 SHUTDOWN_28 3.3 Vdc 58 NC (Power shar-ing)29 3.3 Vdc 59 SPI_ENABLE30 3.3 Vdc 60 SPI_MISO
9-34 68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2QUAD Channel BR BackplaneTable: 9-2548 Vdc Battery Power (P12)Pin Description Description Pin1 + BATTERY + BATTERY 52 + BATTERY + BATTERY 63 - BATTERY (RTN) - BATTERY (RTN) 74 - BATTERY (RTN) - BATTERY (RTN) 8
68P81095E02-D   12/12/2000 9-35EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosQUAD Base Radio SignalsQUAD Base Radio SignalsTable 9-26 lists and describes signals for the QUAD Base Radio .Table: 9-26QUAD Base Radio Signal DescriptionsSignal Name Description Special28.6 Vdc 28.6 Vdc output from PS14.2 Vdc 14.2 Vdc output from PS3.3 Vdc 3.3 Vdc output from PSGND Station GroundRX Branch 1 RX Branch 1 from RFDS 50 ΩRX Branch 2 RX Branch 2 from RFDS 50 ΩRX Branch 3 RX Branch 3 from RFDS 50 ΩRX1_EXP1 RX1 (branch 1) expansion output 1 50 ΩRX1_EXP2 RX1 (branch 1) expansion output 2 50 ΩRX1_EXP3 RX1 (branch 1) expansion output 3 50 ΩRX2_EXP1 RX2 (branch 2) expansion output 1 50 ΩRX2_EXP2 RX2 (branch 2) expansion output 2 50 ΩRX2_EXP3 RX2 (branch 2) expansion output 3 50 ΩRX3_EXP1 RX3 (branch 3) expansion output 1 50 ΩRX3_EXP2 RX3 (branch 3) expansion output 2 50 ΩRX3_EXP3 RX3 (branch 3) expansion output 3 50 Ω5 MHz/1 PPS 5 MHz/1 PPS reference to the BRCSPI_ENABLE Host Centric SPI EnableSPI_MISO Host Centric SPI MISOSPI_MOSI Host Centric SPI MOSISPI_CLK Host Centric SPI ClockSPI_A0 Host SPI Device Address Line A0SPI_A1 Host SPI Device Address Line A1SPI_A2 Host SPI Device AddressLine A2SPI_M0 Host SPI Module Address Line M0SPI_M1 Host SPI Module Address Line M1SPI_M2 Host SPI Module Address Line M2SPI_M3 Host SPI Module Address Line M3WP_ Write Protect (active low)PA_ENABLE Turns off PA bias with active lowSLEEP_ Sleep signal from PSSHUTDOWN_ PS reset line from BRCCD RS232 Carrier DetectRxD RS232 RX Data
9-36 68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2QUAD Base Radio SignalsTxD RS232 TX DataDTR RS232 Data Terminal ReadyDSR RS232 Data Set ReadyRTS RS232 Request to SendCTS RS232 Clear to SendBRG Baud Rate GeneratorRxRESET_ Reset Signal to RX modules16.8MHz_RX 16.8 MHz reference to RX differential16.8MHz_RX_RTN 16.8 MHz reference to RX return differentialClock_SyncA_ Clock Sync signal to RX1 & RX2 For Abacus IIIClock_SyncB_ Clock Sync signal to RX3 & RX4 For Abacus IIISSI_Data_A RX Data from RX module 1 differentialSSI_Data_A_RTN RX Data from RX module 1return differentialSSI_Data_B RX Data from RX module 2 differentialSSI_Data_B_RTN RX Data from RX module 2 return differentialSSI_Data_C RX Data from RX module 3 differentialSSI_Data_C_RTN RX Data from RX module 3 return differentialSSI_Data_D RX Data from RX module 4 differentialSSI_Data_D_RTN RX Data from RX module 4 return differentialSSI_CLK_A RX Clock from RX module 1 differentialSSI_CLK_A_RTN RX Clock from RX module 1 return differentialSSI_CLK_B RX Clock from RX module 2 differentialSSI_CLK_B_RTN RX Clock from RX module 2 return differentialSSI_CLK_C RX Clock from RX module 3 differentialSSI_CLK_C_RTN RX Clock from RX module 3 return differentialSSI_CLK_D RX Clock from RX module 4 differentialSSI_CLK_D_RTN RX Clock from RX module 4 return differentialSSI_FS_A RX Frame Sync from RX module 1SSI_FS_B RX Frame Sync from RX module 2SSI_FS_C RX Frame Sync from RX module 3SSI_FS_D RX Frame Sync from RX module 4DSPIa_En_1 DSPa SPI RX1 Abacus enableDSPIa_En_3 DSPa SPI RX2 Abacus enableDSPIa_En_2 DSPa SPI RX1 & RX2 SGC enableDSPIb_En_1 DSPb SPI RX3 Abacus enableDSPIb_En_3 DSPb SPI RX4 Abacus enableDSPIb_En_2 DSPb SPI RX3 & RX4 SGC enableDSPIa_MOSI DSPa SPI MOSI differentialDSPIa_MOSI_RTN DSPa SPI MOSI return differentialDSPIb_MOSI DSPb SPI MOSI differentialTable: 9-26QUAD Base Radio Signal DescriptionsSignal Name Description Special
68P81095E02-D   12/12/2000 9-37EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 800/900/1500 MHz Base RadiosQUAD Base Radio SignalsDSPIb_MOSI_RTN DSPb SPI MOSI return differentialDSPIa_CLK DSPa SPI Clock differentialDSPIa_CLK_RTN DSPa SPI CLK return differentialDSPIb_CLK DSPb SPI Clock differentialDSPIb_CLK_RTN DSPb SPI CLK return differentialMTR_STAT_ External Wattmeter StatusBAT_STAT_ Battery StatusEXT_VFWD External Wattmeter Forward meterEXT_VREV External Wattmeter Reflected meterEXT_GPO_1_ General purpose output 1EXT_GPO_2_ General purpose output 2EXT_GPI_1_ General purpose input 1EXT_GPI_2_ General purpose input 2NC Not connected reservedTable: 9-26QUAD Base Radio Signal DescriptionsSignal Name Description Special
9-38 68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios EBTS System Manual - Vol 2This Page IntentionallyLeft Blank
 68P81095E06-B   4/1/2000 A - 39 Appendix A    Network Solutions Sector 1301 E. Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196 A   Acronyms A/D Analog-to-Digital A Amperes  AC Alternating Current  ACT active ADA Americans with Disabilities Act AGC Automatic Gain Control AIC Ampere Interrupting Capacity AIS Alarm Indication Signal (Keep Alive) ANSI American National Standards Institute ASCII American National Standard Code for Information Interchange ASIC Application SpeciÞc Integrated Circuit Aux auxiliary avg average AWG American Wire Gauge bd baud BDM Background Debug Mode BER Bit Error Rate BERT Bit Error Rate Test BMR Base Monitor Radio BNC Baby ÒNÓ Connector BPV Bipolar Variation BR Base Radio  BRC Base Radio Controller  BSC Base Site Controller  BTU British Thermal Unit BW bandwidth C/N + 1 Carrier Power to Noise + Interference Ratio CC Control Cabinet CD Carrier Detect cd change directory CLK Clock CLT Controller cm centimeter CMOS Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor CPU Central Processing Unit CSMA/CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access withCollision Detect CTI Coaxial Transceiver Interface CTL Control (Base Radio Control) CTS Clear-to-Send D/A Digital-to-Analog DAP Dispatch Application Processor DB-15 15-pin D-subminiature DB-9 9-pin D-subminiature dB Decibel dBc Decibels relative to carrier dBm Decibels relative to 1mW DC Direct Current DCE Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment DCSPLY DC Supply DDM Dual Device Module deg degree DIN Deutsche Industrie-Norm DIP Dual In-line Package div division
 A - 40 68P81095E06-B   4/1/2000 Appendix A   Acronyms   EBTS System Manual - Vol 2   DMA Direct Memory Access  DOP Dilution of Precision DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory DSP Digital Signal Processor DTE Data Terminal Equipment DTTA Duplexed Tower-Top AmpliÞer DVM Digital Volt Meter E1 European telephone multiplexing standard EAS Environmental Alarm System  E-NET Ethernet EBTS Enhanced Base Transceiver System EGB Exterior Ground Bar EIA Electronics Industry Association EMI Electro-Magnetic Interference EPROM Erasable Programmable Read OnlyMemory EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory ERFC Expansion RF Cabinet ESI Ethernet Serial Interface ESMR Enhanced Special Mobile Radio EX Exciter FB feedback FCC Federal Communications Commission FIFO First-In, First-Out FNE Fixed Network Equipment freq frequency FRU Field Replaceable Unit GFI Ground Fault Interrupter GND ground GPS Global Positioning System GPSR Global Positioning System Receiver HDLC High-level Data Link HSMR High Elevation Specialized Mobile Radio HSO High Stability Oscillator HVAC Heating/Ventilation/Air Conditioning Hz Hertz I/O Input/Output IC Integrated Circuit iDEN integrated Dispatch Enhanced Network IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IF intermediate frequency iMU iDEN Monitor Unit in inches in injection ISA Industry Standard Architecture iSC integrated Site Controller kg kilogram kHz kiloHertz LAN Local Area Network LANIIC Local Area Network Interface IC LAPD Link Access Procedure D-Channel lbs pounds LDM Linear Driver Module LED Light Emitting Diode LFM Linear Final Module LIU Line Interface Unit LLC Link Layer Controller LNA Low Noise AmpliÞer LO Local Oscillator LOS Loss of Signal MAU Media Access Unit max maximum MC Multicoupler MGB Master Ground Bar MGN Multi-Grounded Neutral MHz MegaHertz min minimum
 68P81095E06-B   4/1/2000 A-41EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 Appendix A   Acronyms   min minuteMISO Master In/Slave Outmm millimeterMMI Man-Machine-InterfaceMOSI Master Out/Slave InMPM Multiple Peripheral ModuleMPS Metro Packet Switch MS Mobile Station ms millisecondMSC Mobile Switching CenterMSO Mobile Switching OfÞceMST Modular Screw TerminalsmV milliVoltmW milliWattN.C. Normally ClosedN.O. Normally OpenNEC National Electric CodeNIC Network Interface Cardno. numberNTM NIC Transition ModuleNTWK NetworkOMC Operations and Maintenance Center OSHA Occupational Safety and Health ActPA Power AmpliÞerPAL Programmable Array LogicPC Personal ComputerPCCH Primary Control ChannelPDOP Position Dilution of PrecisionpF picoFaradPLL Phase Locked LoopP/N Part NumberP/O Part Ofppm parts per millionPPS Pulse Per SecondPS Power Supply PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network PVC Polyvinyl Chloridepwr powerQAM Quadrature Amplitude ModulationQRSS Quasi Random Signal SequenceQty QuantityR1 Receiver #1R2 Receiver #2R3 Receiver #3RAM Random Access MemoryRCVR ReceiverRef ReferenceRF Radio Frequency RFC RF CabinetRFDS RF Distribution SystemRFS RF SystemROM Read Only MemoryRPM Revolutions Per MinuteRSSI Received Signal Strength IndicationRTN ReturnRU Rack UnitRx ReceiveRXDSP Receive Digital Signal ProcessorSCI Serial Communications InterfaceSCON VME System ControllerSCRF Stand-alone Control and RF Cabinet (conÞguration)SCSI Small Computer System Interfacesec secondSGC Software Gain ControlSINAD Signal Plus Noise Plus Distortion to Noise Plus Distortion RadioSMART Systems Management Analysis, Research and Test
A-42 68P81095E06-B   4/1/2000Appendix A   Acronyms   EBTS System Manual - Vol 2 SPI Serial Peripheral InterfaceSQE Signal Quality ErrorSRAM Static Random Access MemorySRC Subrate Controller SRI Site Reference Industry standard   SRIB SMART Radio Interface BoxSRRC Single Rack, Redundant Controller (conÞguration)SRSC Single Rack, Single Controller (conÞguration)SS Surge SuppressorSSC System Status ControlSSI Synchronous Serial InterfaceST StatusSTAT StatusStd StandardS/W SoftwareT1 North american telephone mutiplexing standard   TB Terminal BoardTDM Time Division Multiplextelco telephone companySCON VME System ControllerTISIC TDMA Infrastructure Support ICTSI Time Slot InterfaceTSI Time Slot InterchangeTTA Tower-Top AmpliÞerTTL Transistor - Transistor LogicTx TransmitTXD Transmit DataTXDSP Transmit Digital Signal ProcessorTxlin Tranlin ICtyp typicalUL Underwriters LaboratoriesVVolts Vac Volts - alternating current VCO Voltage Controlled OscillatorVCXO Voltage Controlled Crystal OscillatorVdc Volts - direct current VFWD Voltage representation of Forward PowerVME Versa-Module EurocardVp-p Voltage peak-to-peakVREF Voltage representation of Reßected PowerVSWR Voltage Standing Wave RadioWWattWDT Watchdog TimerWP Write ProtectWSAPD Worldwide Systems and Aftermarket Products Division
 Index Network Solutions Sector 68P81095E69-D  11/10/2000-UP 1301 E. Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196 Index-1    Appendix A   Index B Base Radio40W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier TLF2020 (version 1580A) Testing/verification ( Base Radio section ) ............................................................................10-11, 10-23 40W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier TLF2020 (version 1580B) Testing/verification ( Base Radio section ) ............................................................................10-11, 10-23 60W, 900 MHz Power Amplifier CLN1355A Testing/verification ( Base Radio section ) .......................................................................................10-19 70W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier TLN3335 (version CTF1040) Testing/verification (Base Radio section) .........................................................................................12-2 Testing/verification ( Base Radio section ) .......................................................................................10-15 70W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier TLN3335 (version CTF1050) Testing/verification (Base Radio section) .........................................................................................12-2 Testing/verification ( Base Radio section ) .......................................................................................10-15 800 MHz, 3X Receiver CLN1283 and 900 MHz, 3X Receiver CLN1356 Diversity uses and cautions ( Base Radio section ) .....................................................................9-3, 9-12 Overview ( Base Radio section ) ....................................................................................................9-1, 9-12 Replacement compatibility ( Base Radio section ) ..............................................................................9-2 Theory of operation ( Base Radio section ) ..................................................................................9-5, 9-14 AC Power Supply Controls and indicators ( Base Radio section ) .....................................................................................8-1 Overview ( Base Radio section ) .............................................................................................................8-1 Theory of operation ( Base Radio section ) ...........................................................................................8-3 Backplane connector information ( Base Radio section ) ...........................................................10-35, 11-22 Base Radio Controller Controls and indicators ( Base Radio section ) ............................................................................2-3, 2-12 Theory of operation ( Base Radio section ) ..................................................................................2-5, 2-15 Base Radio/Base Radio FRU replacement procedures ( Base Radio section ) ..........................10-5, 11-5 Controls and indicators ( Base Radio section ) ....................................................................................1-5, 1-10 DC Power Supply ( Base Radio section )Controls and indicators ....................................................................................................................7-1, 7-5 Description .........................................................................................................................................7-1, 7-4 Theory of operation ..........................................................................................................................7-3, 7-6 Exciter Description ( Base Radio section ) ...................................................................................................5-1, 5-7 Theory of operation ( Base Radio section ) ....................................................................................5-3, 5-8 Overview ( Base Radio section ) ................................................................................................................1-4, 1-9 Performance specifications ( Base Radio section ) .............................................................................1-5, 1-10 Station verification procedures ( Base Radio section ) ..................................................................10-9, 11-10 Theory of operation ( Base Radio section ) ...........................................................................................1-7, 1-12 Troubleshooting ( Base Radio section ) ...............................................................................................10-1, 11-1
 Index EBTS Base Radios Index-2 68P81095E69-D   11/10/2000 M Maintenance Philosophy ( Foreword ) ................................................................................................................... x Motorola Customer Support CenterSupport Center address and phone number ( Foreword ) ........................................................................... x P Purpose of Manual ( Foreword ) .............................................................................................................................ix

Navigation menu